2013 Cadillac XTS Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-43
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-64
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-45
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-51
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Keys, Doors, and
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
iii
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
The names, logos, emblems,
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath,
and XTS are trademarks and/or
service marks of General Motors
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,
or licensors.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
Helm, Incorporated
Attention: Customer Service
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20958490 B Second Printing
© 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Introduction
Symbols
G : Air Conditioning
WARNING
{
Refrigerant Oil
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
I : Certified Technician
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
H : Flammable
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
Vehicle Symbol Chart
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.
Changer
( : Heated Steering Wheel
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
v
: : Oil Pressure
O : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-1
In Brief
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Steering Wheel
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-18
Active Emergency Braking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Universal Remote System . . . 1-19
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Vehicle Features
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Driving for Better Fuel
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Heated and Ventilated
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-15
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8‑11.
StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑29.
Phone Button. See Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
2. Electric Parking Brake on
page 9‑26.
7. Infotainment Display.
Heated Steering Wheel on
page 5‑3 (If Equipped).
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑6.
Infotainment System. See the
infotainment manual.
13. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 5‑31 (If Equipped).
8. Glove Box Button. See Glove
Box on page 4‑2.
14. Horn on page 5‑3.
3. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
Parking Assist Button. See
Driver Assistance Systems on
page 9‑43.
15. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2.
Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on
page 6‑6.
16. START/STOP Button. See
Ignition Positions on
page 9‑15.
9. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 4‑1.
4. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.
10. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10‑4.
17. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑22.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Display. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
11. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18.
18. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 4‑1.
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
19. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Uplevel) on page 8‑1
or Dual Automatic Climate
Control System (Base) on
page 8‑6.
12. Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
6. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑5.
Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9‑34 (If Equipped).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9‑53.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9‑47 (If
Equipped).
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑9.
Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑28.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
In Brief
L : Press and release one time to
initiate vehicle locator. Press and
hold for three seconds to sound the
panic alarm. Press again or start the
vehicle to cancel the panic alarm.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle.
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
Starting the Vehicle
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
| : Press and hold to release the
1. Press and release Q on the
trunk.
RKE transmitter.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
2. Immediately press and hold /
for at least two seconds or until
the turn signal lamps flash.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter may be used to lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m
(195 ft) away from the vehicle.
3. Press the brake pedal and select
the ON/RUN/START ignition
mode to drive the vehicle.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
Q : Press to lock all doors.
K : Press to unlock the driver door
or all doors depending on the
vehicle personalization settings.
See “Remote Lock, Unlock, Start”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
Press the key release button near
the bottom of the transmitter to
remove the key. The key can be
used for the driver door.
See Keys on page 2‑1 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-5
.
From the inside, to lock a door
push down on the door lock
knob on top of the door. To
unlock a door, pull once on the
door handle to unlock it, and
again to open it.
Canceling a Remote Start
Trunk
To cancel a remote start, do any of
the following:
.
Press and hold / until the
parking lamps turn off.
Power Door Locks
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Turn the vehicle on and then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑8.
Door Locks
To open the trunk, press | from
inside the vehicle or on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
or push the touch pad on the rear of
the trunk above the license plate.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3 and
Trunk on page 2‑14.
To lock or unlock a door manually:
.
From the outside, if the vehicle
is equipped with keyless access,
press the button on the door
handle and pull the handle when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is within range. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
.
From the inside, press Q or K.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑12.
.
From the outside, press Q or K
on the RKE transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
.
Use the key in the driver door.
The key cylinder is covered by a
cap. See Door Locks on
page 2‑10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
In Brief
.
.
Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
Windows
Raise or lower the seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
See Power Windows on page 2‑20.
Seat Adjustment
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
Power Seats
Lumbar Adjustment
The power windows only operate
with the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑19.
To adjust the seat:
The power window switches on the
driver door control all the windows.
Each passenger door has a switch
that controls only that window.
.
Move the seat forward or
To adjust the lumbar support:
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.
Press and hold the control
forward to increase or rearward
to decrease lumbar support.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-7
.
Press and hold the control
upward to raise or downward to
lower the height of the lumbar
support.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑6.
The vehicle will also automatically
save driver seat, outside mirror, and
power tilt and telescoping steering
column positions to the current
driver Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter when the ignition is
placed in OFF/LOCK. These
automatically stored positions are
referred to as RKE Memory
positions.
Memory Features
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑5.
Reclining Seatbacks
See Memory Seats on page 3‑7 and
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
Second Row Seats
On some vehicles, either side of the
seatback can be folded for more
cargo space.
If available, the SET, "1," "2," and
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
are used to manually save and
recall memory settings for the driver
seat, outside mirrors, and power tilt
and telescoping steering column.
These manually stored positions are
referred to as Button Memory
positions.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑11.
To adjust the seatback:
.
Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
In Brief
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The indicator lights
next to the buttons indicate three for
the highest setting and one for the
lowest. If the front heated seats are
on high, the level may automatically
be lowered after approximately
30 minutes.
See Head Restraints on page 3‑2
and Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
Heated and Ventilated
Seats
Safety Belts
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑9.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
If available, the buttons are near the
climate controls on the center stack.
To operate, the ignition must be in
ON/RUN/START.
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly:
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
position.
Press J or z to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
.
Safety Belts on page 3‑14.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Press C or { to ventilate the driver
Properly on page 3‑15.
or passenger seat.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑16.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-9
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑43.
passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑29.
2. Press one of the four arrows to
move the mirror.
3. Move the selector switch to ) to
The passenger airbag status
indicator lights on the overhead
console when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑17.
deselect the mirror.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. See Folding Mirrors on
page 2‑19.
Interior Mirror
Adjustment
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirror
Hold the rearview mirror in the
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle.
United States
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. The mirror
will automatically reduce the glare
from the headlamps from behind.
The dimming feature comes on
when the vehicle is started. See
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
on page 2‑19.
Canada
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions. No
other airbag is affected by the
1. Move the selector switch to L
(Left) or R (Right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
In Brief
Reading Lamps
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Interior Lighting
There are reading lamps on the
overhead console and over the rear
passenger doors. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened. To manually turn
the reading lamps on or off:
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp is in the overhead
console.
Press the control to move the tilt
and telescoping steering wheel up
and down or forward and rearward.
To change the dome lamp settings,
press the following:
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Press m or n next to each
overhead console reading lamp.
OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
when a door is open.
DOOR: The lamp comes on
automatically when a door is
opened.
ON: Turns the dome lamp on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-11
AUTO: Automatically turns the
exterior lamps on and off,
Exterior Lighting
depending on outside lighting.
; : Turns on the parking lamps,
together with the sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
instrument panel lights.
5 : Turns on the headlamps,
together with the parking lamps,
sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
The exterior lamp control is on the
turn signal lever.
Press the button near the rear
passenger reading lamps.
See:
Turn the control to the following
positions:
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
For more information on interior
lighting, see Instrument Panel
Illumination Control on page 6‑6.
page 6‑1
O : Turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO
position after it is released. Turn to
O again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 6‑6
.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
In Brief
Windshield Wiper/Washer
INT: Move the lever up to INT for
intermittent wipes, then turn the x
INT band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
move the lever to select the wiper
speed.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
HI: Use for fast wipes.
LO: Use for slow wipes.
8 : For a single wipe, briefly move
the lever down. For several wipes,
hold the lever down.
n L : Pull the lever toward you to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-13
9. Defrost
Climate Controls
10. Rear Window Defogger
11. Recirculation
The climate control buttons and the touch screen are used to adjust the
heating, cooling, and ventilation.
Dual Automatic Climate Control (Base)
1. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
5. OFF (Fan)
6. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature)
2. Fan Control
3. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
4. Air Delivery Mode Control
7. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats (If Equipped)
8. AC (Air Conditioning)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
In Brief
1. Outside Temperature Display
2. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Displays
3. Fan Control
4. SYNC TEMP (Synchronized
Temperature)
5. AC Mode (Air Conditioning)
6. Climate Control Selection
(Application Tray Button)
7. Rear (Rear Climate Control
Touch Screen)
Dual Automatic Climate Control (Uplevel)
8. Air Delivery Mode Control
1. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Uplevel) on page 8‑1 or
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Base) on page 8‑6 and
Rear Climate Control System on
page 8‑9 (If Equipped).
2. Fan Control
3. OFF (Fan)
4. Driver and Passenger Heated
and Ventilated Seats (If
Equipped)
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
6. Defrost
7. Rear Window Defogger
8. Recirculation
Dual Automatic Climate Control
Touch Screen (Uplevel)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-15
Tap Shift allows the driver to
Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Tap Shift
Vehicle Features
manually control the automatic
transmission. To use Tap Shift, the
shift lever must be in M (Manual
Mode). Vehicles with this feature
have indicators on the steering
wheel. The controls are on the back
of the steering wheel. Tap the left
control to downshift, and the right
control to upshift. A Driver
Steering Wheel Controls
Information Center (DIC) message
indicates the gear the vehicle is in.
See Manual Mode on page 9‑24.
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
g : For vehicles with OnStar® or a
Bluetooth® system, press to talk or
interact with those systems. See
OnStar Overview on page 14‑1 or
“Bluetooth” in the separate
infotainment manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
In Brief
+RES: Press briefly to resume to a
previously set speed or to increase
vehicle speed if the cruise control is
already activated.
c : Press to decline an incoming
call, or end a current call. Press to
mute or unmute the infotainment
system when not on a call.
x + or x −: Press to increase or
decrease the volume.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2.
SET−: Press briefly to set the
speed and activate cruise control or
to decrease vehicle speed if the
cruise control is already activated.
Cruise Control
* : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑32 or
Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9‑34 (if equipped).
Infotainment System
See the separate infotainment
manual for information on the radio,
audio players, phone, navigation
system, and voice or speech
recognition. It also includes
information on settings and
downloadable applications (if
equipped).
S or T : Press to go to the
previous or next menu option.
y or z : Move SEL up or down to
J : Press to turn the system on
and off. A white indicator appears in
the instrument cluster when
turned on.
go to the next or previous selection.
SEL: Press to select a highlighted
menu option.
C or B : Press to go to the next or
previous favorite radio station or
CD/MP3 track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
Lane Departure
1-17
SEL: Press to open a menu or
select a menu item. Press and hold
to reset values on certain screens.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Warning (LDW)
The DIC display is in the instrument
cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems.
LDW is intended to help avoid
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑28.
unintentional lane departures at
speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or
greater. LDW uses a camera sensor
to detect the lane markings. The
Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System
FCA is intended to help avoid or
reduce the harm caused by
LDW indicator, @, appears green if
a lane marking is detected. If the
vehicle departs the lane, the
indicator will change to amber and
flash. In addition, the driver seat will
pulse or beeps will sound.
front-end crashes. FCA provides a
green indicator when a vehicle is
detected directly ahead. It provides
a flashing visual alert and pulses
the driver seat, or beeps, when
approaching a vehicle directly
ahead too quickly. FCA also
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9‑53.
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA)
provides a visual alert if following
another vehicle much too closely.
y or z : Move SEL up or down to
If available, SBZA will alert the
driver to vehicles in the vehicle's
side blind zone. When the system
detects a vehicle in the side blind
zone, the SBZA display will light up
in the corresponding outside side
mirror and will flash if the turn signal
is on.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9‑47.
go to the previous or next selection.
S or T : Press to move between
the interactive display zones in the
cluster. Press S to go back to the
previous menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
In Brief
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
on page 9‑52.
The vehicle may also have the Front
Parking Assist system, a higher
speed Backing Warning System,
and the Rear Automatic Braking
system.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
RVC displays a view of the area
behind the vehicle, on the center
stack display, when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse).
The vehicle has three accessory
power outlets:
See Driver Assistance Systems on
page 9‑43.
.
Inside the front storage area
Active Emergency
Braking System
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) it also has the Active
Emergency Braking System, which
includes Intelligent Brake
Assist (IBA) and the Automatic
Collision Preparation (ACP) System.
These systems can provide a boost
to braking or automatically brake the
vehicle to help avoid crashes.
below the climate control
system.
See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9‑43.
.
Inside the center console.
.
On the rear of the center
console.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
URPA uses sensors on the rear
bumper to assist with parking and
avoiding objects while in
R (Reverse). It operates at speeds
less than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA
may display a warning triangle on
the Rear Vision Camera screen and
a graphic on the instrument cluster
to provide the object distance. In
addition, multiple beeps or pulses
may occur if very close to an object.
Lift the cover to access the
accessory power outlet.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
See Active Emergency Braking
System on page 9‑50.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-19
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Remote system. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Remote
system.
Universal Remote System
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑51.
Sunroof
For vehicles equipped with a
1. ~ Sunroof Switch
sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to
operate the sunroof and power
sunshade. See Ignition Positions on
page 9‑15 and Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑19.
2. Q Sunshade Switch
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Sunroof Switch
Vent Feature: Press and hold the
front of ~ to vent the sunroof. The
sunshade will automatically open
approximately 38 cm (15 in). Press
and hold the rear of ~ to close
the vent.
Comfort Stop Feature: This
feature stops the sunroof from
opening fully. Press and release the
rear of ~ to open the sunroof to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
In Brief
StabiliTrak® System
the comfort open position. Press the
Performance and
Maintenance
rear of ~ again to open the
sunroof fully. If the sunshade is not
fully open when the comfort feature
is pressed the second time, the
sunshade will open fully.
StabiliTrak assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. The system turns
on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system turns on
automatically every time the vehicle
is started.
Express Close: Press and release
.
To turn off both traction control
the front of ~ to express close the
sunroof.
and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the TCS/StabiliTrak button g on
the center stack until i and g
come on in the instrument
cluster and the appropriate DIC
message is displayed. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑42.
Sunshade Switch
.
To turn off traction control, press
Open/Close: Press and hold the
and release the TCS/StabiliTrak
front or rear of Q to open or close
the sunshade to the desired
position.
button g on the center stack. i
comes on in the instrument
cluster and the appropriate DIC
message is displayed. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑42.
Express Open/Express Close:
Press and release the rear or front
.
Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button
g again to turn on both systems.
of Q to express open or express
close the sunshade. If the sunroof is
opened, the sunshade will express
close within a few inches of the
opened sunroof.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑29.
.
Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button
g again to turn traction control
back on.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑28.
See Sunroof on page 2‑24.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-21
tire pressures are getting low and
the tires need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
OIL SOON message when it is time
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain
the correct tire pressures.
Resetting the Oil Life System
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑43.
1. Using the DIC controls on the
right side of the steering wheel,
display REMAINING OIL LIFE
on the DIC. See Driver
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28. When remaining oil
life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
will appear on the display. See
Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑37.
The low tire pressure warning light
alerts to a significant loss in
pressure of one of the vehicle's
tires. If the warning light comes on,
stop as soon as possible and inflate
the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.
The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
This vehicle may come with a spare
tire and tire changing equipment or
a tire sealant and compressor kit.
The kit can be used to temporarily
seal small punctures in the tread
area of the tire. See Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit on page 10‑57.
2. Press SEL on the DIC controls
and hold SEL down for a few
seconds to clear the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
and reset the oil life at 100%.
If the vehicle came with a spare tire
and tire changing equipment, see If
a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑55.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
may be an early indicator that the
Be careful not to reset the oil life
display accidentally at any time
other than after the oil is
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
In Brief
.
.
.
Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
change.
TTY Users (U.S. Only):
1-888-889-2438
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
New vehicles are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Service
program.
The oil life system can also be reset
as follows:
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
1. Turn the ignition on with the
engine off.
See Roadside Service on
page 13‑5.
.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
Roadside Service and OnStar
If the vehicle has an active OnStar
subscription, contact OnStar and the
vehicle’s current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor to
assess the situation, contact
.
.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message is not on, the
system is reset.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
Roadside Service, and relay the
exact location to send help.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑9.
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
OnStar®
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services. See OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1.
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Roadside Service
U.S.: 1-800-224-1400
Canada: 1-800-882-1112
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-1
Vehicle Security
Keys and Locks
Keys, Doors, and
Windows
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-16
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-17
Keys
WARNING
{
Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-12
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Leaving children in a vehicle with
a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous and
children or others could be
seriously injured or killed. They
could operate the power windows
or other controls or make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the RKE transmitter
in the vehicle, and children or
others could be caught in the path
of a closing window. Do not leave
children in a vehicle with an RKE
transmitter.
Interior Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . 2-23
Doors
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Keys, Doors, and Windows
driver door and for locking the rear
seatbacks so they cannot be folded.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑11.
Contact Roadside Service if locked
out of the vehicle. See Roadside
Service on page 13‑5.
With an active OnStar subscription,
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
To remove the key, press the button
near the bottom of the transmitter,
and pull the key out. Never pull the
key out without pressing the button.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
.
Check the distance. The
If it becomes difficult to turn the key,
inspect the key blade for debris.
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
There is a key inside the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter that
is used for locking/unlocking the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-3
.
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
Personalization on page 5‑45. If the
passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Alarm System on page 2‑16.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door or all doors depending
on the personalization settings. See
“Remote Lock, Unlock, Start” under
Vehicle Personalization on
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The RKE transmitter functions may
work up to 60 m (195 ft) away from
the vehicle.
With Remote Start Shown, Without
Similar
page 5‑45. When remotely
unlocking the vehicle at night, the
headlamps and back-up lamps will
come on for about 30 seconds to
light your approach to the vehicle.
The turn signal indicators may flash
to indicate unlocking. See “Remote
Lock, Unlock, Start” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑45.
Other conditions, such as those
previously stated, can impact the
performance of the transmitter.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate locking. See “Remote Lock,
Unlock, Start” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑45.
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock and the
driver door will immediately unlock,
if “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out” is
enabled. See “Unlocked Door Anti
Lock Out” under Vehicle
Memory seat positions may be
recalled when unlocking the vehicle.
See “Remote Lock, Unlock, Start”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keyless Access Operation
Pressing K will disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Alarm System on page 2‑16.
The keyless access system allows
for door and trunk to be locked and
unlocked without pressing the RKE
transmitter button. The RKE
transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)
of the door being opened. If the
vehicle has this feature, there will be
a button on the outside front door
handles.
On some models, pressing and
holding K will open all of the
windows.
/ (Remote Start): For vehicles
with this feature, press and release
Q and then Immediately press and
hold / for at least two seconds to
start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑8.
Keyless access can be programmed
to unlock all doors on the first lock/
unlock press from the driver door.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Similar
Pressing the lock/unlock button will
cause all doors to lock if any of the
following occur:
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from
the Driver Door
Alarm): Press and release one
time to initiate vehicle locator. The
exterior lamps flash and the horn
chirps three times. Press and hold
L for three seconds to sound the
panic alarm. The horn sounds and
the turn signal lamps flash for
.
It has been more than
five seconds since the first lock/
unlock button press.
When the doors are locked and the
RKE transmitter is within range of
the door handle, pressing the lock/
unlock button on the driver door
handle will unlock the driver door.
If the lock/unlock button is pressed
again within five seconds, all
.
Two lock/unlock button presses
were used to unlock all doors.
.
Any vehicle door has been
opened and all doors are now
closed.
30 seconds, or until L is pressed
again or the vehicle is started.
passenger doors will unlock.
| (Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold to release the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-5
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from
the Passenger Doors
transmitter has been removed from
the interior of the vehicle, the doors
will lock after eight seconds.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
When the doors are locked and the
RKE transmitter is within range of
the door handle, pressing the lock/
unlock button on a passenger door
handle will unlock all doors.
Pressing the lock/unlock button will
cause all doors to lock if any of the
following occur:
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a
Temporarily disable the locking
feature by pressing and holding the
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
The vehicle can be reprogrammed
so that lost or stolen transmitters no
longer work. Each vehicle can have
up to eight transmitters matched
to it.
power door K switch for several
seconds with a door open. Passive
locking will then remain disabled
until the power door Q switch is
pressed, or until the vehicle is
turned on.
.
The lock/unlock button was used
to unlock all doors.
To customize whether the doors
automatically lock when exiting the
vehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,
Start” under Vehicle Personalization
on page 5‑45.
.
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter (Keyless Access
Vehicles Only)
Any vehicle door has been
opened and all doors are now
closed.
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
Passive Locking
Keyless Trunk Opening
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature allows
for selecting whether the doors
automatically lock during normal
vehicle exit. When the vehicle is
turned off and all doors are closed,
the vehicle will determine how many
RKE transmitters remain in the
vehicle interior. If at least one RKE
Press the touch pad on the rear of
the trunk above the license plate to
open the trunk when the RKE
transmitter is in range.
To program, the vehicle must be off
and all of the transmitters, both
currently recognized and new, must
be with you.
Keyed Access
1. Open the center console storage
area and the storage tray.
For accessing a vehicle with a dead
transmitter battery, see Door Locks
on page 2‑10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Keys, Doors, and Windows
The Driver Information Center
6. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitter pocket and press K
or Q on the transmitter.
(DIC) displays READY TO
LEARN ELECTRONIC KEY #2,
3, 4, ETC.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the START button for
approximately 12 seconds to exit
programming mode.
Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter (Keyless
Access Vehicles Only)
2. Place the recognized
transmitter(s) in the pocket. The
transmitter pocket is inside the
center console storage area
between the driver and front
passenger seats.
If there are no currently recognized
transmitters available, follow this
procedure to program up to eight
transmitters. This feature is not
available in Canada. This procedure
will take approximately 30 minutes
to complete. The vehicle must be off
and all transmitters to be
4. Replace the recognized
transmitter with a new
transmitter. Place the new
transmitter in the transmitter
pocket.
3. Remove the key lock cylinder
cap. See Door Locks on
page 2‑10. Insert the vehicle key
into the key lock cylinder on the
driver door handle. Then turn the
key counterclockwise, to the
unlock position, five times within
10 seconds.
5. Press the START button. When
the transmitter is learned, the
DIC display will show that it is
ready to program the next
transmitter.
programmed must be with you.
1. Remove the key lock cylinder
cap. See Door Locks on
page 2‑10. Insert the vehicle key
into the key lock cylinder on the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-7
driver door handle; then turn the
key counterclockwise, to the
unlock position five times within
10 seconds.
6. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitter pocket and press K
or Q on the transmitter.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and
hold the START button for
approximately 12 seconds to exit
programming mode.
2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC
displays PRESS ENGINE
START BUTTON TO LEARN,
then press the START button.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
The DIC display will again show
REMOTE LEARN PENDING,
PLEASE WAIT.
4. Place the new transmitter in the
transmitter pocket. The
transmitter pocket is inside the
center console storage area
between the driver and front
passenger seats. The storage
area will need to be opened to
access the transmitter pocket.
If the transmitter battery is weak,
or if there is interference with the
signal, the DIC may display a
message when you try to start the
vehicle. See Key and Lock
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional
times. After the third time all
previously known transmitters
will no longer work with the
vehicle. Remaining transmitters
can be relearned during the next
steps.
Messages on page 5‑38.
5. Press the START button. When
the transmitter is learned, the
DIC display will show that it is
ready to program the next
transmitter.
To start the vehicle:
1. Open the center console storage
area and the storage tray.
The DIC display should now
show READY FOR
REMOTE # 1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message displays in the DIC.
4. Insert the new battery on the
back housing, positive side
facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
1. Press the button near the bottom
of the transmitter and pull the
key out.
5. Align the key release button and
snap the transmitter back
together.
Remote Vehicle Start
If available, this feature allows the
engine to be started from outside
the vehicle.
2. Place the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This
button will be on the RKE
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start.
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
N (Neutral), press the brake
pedal and the START button.
The climate control system will use
the previous settings during a
remote start. The rear window
defogger may come on during
remote start based on cold ambient
conditions. The rear defog indicator
light does not come on during
remote start.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
2. Use the oval base of the key
blade to separate the two halves
of the transmitter.
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
3. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-9
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
start the vehicle has been
For example, if the vehicle has been
running for five minutes, and
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
received. If the vehicle's lamps
are not visible, press and hold
/ for at least two seconds.
During the remote start, the
doors will be locked and the
parking lamps will remain on as
long as the engine is running.
A maximum of two remote starts,
or a remote start with an extension,
are allowed between ignition cycles.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not
use the remote start feature. The
vehicle may run out of fuel.
The vehicle's ignition must be
The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension is done or the ignition
is put in ON/RUN/START.
changed to ON/RUN/START and
then back to OFF before the remote
start procedure can be used again.
The RKE transmitter range may be
less while the vehicle is running.
Canceling a Remote Start
Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System on page 2‑2.
3. Press the brake pedal and select
the ON/RUN/START ignition
mode to drive the vehicle.
To cancel a remote start, do any of
the following:
.
Press and hold / until the
Extending Engine Run Time
parking lamps turn off.
Starting the Engine Using Remote
Start
For a 10-minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
still running. The remote start can
only be extended once.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
1. Press and release Q on the
.
Turn the vehicle on and then
RKE transmitter.
back off.
When the remote start is extended,
the second 10-minute period will
start immediately.
2. Immediately press and hold /
for at least two seconds or until
the turn signal lamps flash. This
confirms the request to remote
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
Door Locks
WARNING (Continued)
The remote start will not operate if
any of the following occur:
WARNING
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
{
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
The ignition is in any mode other
.
than OFF.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
the vehicle. Locking the doors
can help prevent this from
happening.
.
Passengers, especially
.
The transmitter is in the vehicle.
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
.
The hood is not closed.
.
The hazard warning flashers
are on.
.
There is an emission control
.
From the inside, to lock a door
push down on the door lock
knob on top of the door. To
unlock a door, pull once on the
door handle to unlock it, and
again to open it.
system malfunction.
.
The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
.
The oil pressure is low.
.
Two remote vehicle starts have
.
already been used.
From the outside, if the vehicle
is equipped with keyless access,
press the button on the door
handle and pull the handle when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is within range. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
.
.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-11
.
Use the key in the driver door.
The key cylinder is covered by
a cap.
3. Move the cap (2) rearward.
4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder.
To replace the cap:
Key Cylinder Access
1. Pull the door handle to the open
position.
1. Door Handle
2. Cap
3. Slot
4. Key
2. Insert the two tabs (3) at the
back of the cap (4) between the
black seal (1) and the metal
base (2).
To access the key cylinder:
1. Pull the door handle (1) to the
open position.
2. Insert the key (4) into the slot (3)
on the bottom of the cap (2) and
pry outward.
3. Move the cap forward and press
to snap the cap into place.
4. Release the door handle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
Automatic Door Locks
This feature delays the actual
locking of the doors.
The doors will lock automatically
when all doors are closed, the
ignition is on, and the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park). The doors
will automatically unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is moved into P (Park).
When Q is pressed on the power
door lock switch, while the door is
open, a chime will sound three
times indicating that delayed locking
is active.
Use the manual or power door locks
to unlock the doors if someone
needs to exit, and to lock the doors
again.
When all the doors are closed, the
doors will lock automatically after
five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed,
the five-second timer will reset once
all the doors are closed again.
The power door locks can be
programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
Press Q on the door lock switch
again or press Q on the RKE
transmitter to override this feature
and lock the doors immediately.
This feature can also be
programmed. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑45.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-13
locking is requested for all doors to
Lockout Protection
If the vehicle is in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START
with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter in the
vehicle and the power door lock
switch is pressed with the driver
door open, all the doors will lock
and only the driver door will unlock.
Press v { to activate the safety
locks on the rear doors. The
indicator light in the switch will
illuminate when activated.
remain locked. When this feature is
off, the Delayed Door Lock menu
will be available.
This feature can also be
programmed. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑45.
The rear door power windows are
also disabled. See Power Windows
on page 2‑20.
Press v { again to deactivate the
safety locks.
Safety Locks
The rear door safety locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear
doors from inside the vehicle.
If the vehicle is off with the RKE
transmitter in the vehicle and the
power door lock switch is pressed
with the driver door open, all the
doors will lock and only the driver
door will unlock after closing all of
the doors.
If a rear door handle is pulled when
the safety lock is deactivated, that
door will remain locked and the
indicator light may flash. Release
the handle, then press the safety
lock twice to deactivate the safety
locks.
This feature can be manually
overridden with the driver door open
by pressing and holding Q on the
power door lock switch.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When this feature is on and door
locking is requested with the driver
door open, all doors will lock and
only the driver door will unlock. The
driver door must be closed before
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Trunk Lock Release
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See “Climate
Control Systems” in the
Index.
Trunk
WARNING
{
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate or trunk/hatch open,
or with any objects that pass
through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
See Engine Exhaust on
page 9‑21.
To open the trunk, press | from
inside the vehicle or on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
or push the touch pad on the rear of
the trunk above the license plate.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
With the keyless access system,
if the vehicle is locked, the RKE
must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk
for it to be recognized; then the
trunk can be opened by the touch
pad on the rear of the trunk above
the license plate.
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-15
There is a glow-in-the-dark
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
emergency trunk release handle on
the trunk lid. This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle to open the trunk
from the inside.
Use the handle to assist in closing
the trunk. Do not use the handle as
a tie-down.
If the vehicle is ever without power,
the trunk area can still be accessed
by folding the rear seat:
Notice: Do not use the
1. Fold down the rear seatback.
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑11.
2. Reach inward through the
opening to locate the emergency
trunk release handle.
3. Pull the release handle toward
the front of the vehicle to open
the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Arming the System
Disarming the System
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
the vehicle impossible to steal.
1. Close all doors, the trunk, and
the hood.
To disarm the system, either unlock
the doors using the transmitter,
or start the vehicle with a
recognized transmitter in the
vehicle.
2. Lock the vehicle using the
transmitter or the power door
lock switch. The indicator light
on the instrument panel should
come on and stay on for about
30 seconds.
Vehicle Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
.
Lock the vehicle with the
transmitter after all occupants
have left the vehicle and all
doors are closed.
3. After 30 seconds, or after Q is
pressed again, the alarm system
will arm, and the indicator light
will begin to slowly flash
.
Always unlock a door with the
indicating the alarm is operating.
transmitter. Unlocking the driver
door with the key will not disarm
the alarm.
If a door, the hood, or trunk is
opened without first unlocking with
the transmitter, the turn signals will
flash and the horn will sound for
about 30 seconds. The alarm
If you set off the alarm by accident,
turn off the alarm by pressing K on
the transmitter, or start the vehicle
with a recognized transmitter in the
vehicle. The alarm will not stop if
you unlock the driver door with
the key.
The indicator light, on the
instrument panel near the
windshield, indicates the status of
the system.
system will then re-arm to monitor
for the next unauthorized event.
The theft-deterrent alarm system will
not activate if the doors are locked
with the key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-17
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the vehicle is
turned off.
vehicle. If the transmitter is ever
damaged, you may not be able to
start your vehicle.
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
If K is pressed and the horn chirps
three times, the alarm was activated
while the system was armed.
The immobilization system is
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
disarmed when the pushbutton start
is activated to enter the ACC/
ACCESSORY mode or the ON/
RUN/START mode and a valid
transmitter is present in the vehicle.
If the alarm has been activated, a
message will appear on the DIC.
See Security Messages on
page 5‑43.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the vehicle will not change ignition
modes (ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/
RUN/START, OFF), and the RKE
transmitter appears to be
undamaged, try another transmitter.
Or, you may try placing the
transmitter in the transmitter pocket
in the center console. See Key and
Lock Messages on page 5‑38.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
The security light in the instrument
cluster comes on if there is a
problem with arming or disarming
the theft-deterrent system.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
If the ignition modes will not change
with the other transmitter, your
vehicle needs service. If the ignition
does change modes, the first
transmitter may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the
The system has one or more RKE
transmitters matched to an
immobilizer control unit in your
vehicle. Only a correctly matched
RKE transmitter will start the
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Keys, Doors, and Windows
theft-deterrent system and have a
new RKE transmitter programmed to
the vehicle.
Power Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
It is possible for the immobilizer
system to learn new or replacement
RKE transmitters. Up to eight
transmitters can be programmed for
the vehicle. To program additional
transmitters, see “Programming
Transmitters to the Vehicle” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
CAUTION
{
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
System Operation on page 2‑3.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
1. Move the selector switch to L
(Left) or R (Right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2. Press one of the four arrows to
move the mirror.
3. Move the selector switch to ) to
deselect the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-19
Exterior Automatic Dimming
Mirror
Puddle Light
Interior Mirrors
The vehicle has a puddle light on
the mirror housings. The light will
illuminate the ground when the door
is opened.
The vehicle may have a driver
exterior automatic dimming mirror
that will automatically adjust for the
glare of headlamps behind.
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
To adjust the inside rearview mirror,
hold the rearview mirror in the
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
Memory Mirrors
Manual Folding Mirrors
The vehicle may have memory
mirrors. See Memory Seats on
page 3‑7.
The mirrors can be folded inward
toward the vehicle to prevent
damage when going through an
automatic car wash. Push the mirror
outward to return it to the original
position.
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. The mirror
will automatically reduce the glare
from the headlamps from behind.
The dimming feature comes on
when the vehicle is started.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The vehicle may have SBZA. See
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 9‑52.
Cleaning the Mirror
Heated Mirrors
Turn Signal Indicator
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
The vehicle has a turn signal
indicator on the mirror housings.
The indicator will flash when a turn
signal or the hazard warning
flashers are used.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Uplevel) on page 8‑1 or
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Base) on page 8‑6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Keys, Doors, and Windows
The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof, if equipped.
Windows
WARNING
{
Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
Power Windows
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke.
WARNING
{
The power windows only operate
with the ignition in ACC/
Children could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
leave the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter in a vehicle with
children. When there are children
in the rear seat, use the window
lockout switch to prevent
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑19.
The power window switches on the
driver door control all the windows.
Each passenger door has a switch
that controls only that window.
operation of the windows. See
Keys on page 2‑1.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-21
Express-Down/Up Windows
Express Window Anti-Pinch
Override
Programming the Power
Windows
Windows with the express feature
allow the windows to be raised and
lowered all the way without holding
the switch.
If the vehicle battery has been
WARNING
{
recharged or disconnected, or is not
working, the front power windows
will need to be reprogrammed for
the express-up feature to work.
Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.
If express override is activated,
the window will not reverse
Press or pull the switch fully and
release it to activate the express
feature.
automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could
be damaged. Before you use
express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
The express mode can be canceled
by briefly pressing or pulling the
switch.
To program:
1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
RAP is active, close all doors.
Express Window Anti-Pinch
Feature
2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window
is fully open.
The anti-pinch feature can be
overridden. Hold the window switch
all the way up to the second
position. The window will rise for as
long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express
mode is reactivated.
If any object is in the path of the
window when the express-up is
active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a
preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe icing may
also cause the window to
auto-reverse. The window will return
to normal operation after the
obstruction or condition is removed.
3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
In this mode, the window can close
on an object in its path. Use care
when using the override mode.
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Window Operation from
Outside the Vehicle
Window Lockout
Press v { again to deactivate the
lockout switch.
The vehicle may be equipped with a
remote venting window feature. As
If the indicator light flashes, the
feature may not be working properly.
you approach the vehicle, press "
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Sun Visors
transmitter once, then press " again
and continue to hold the button for
three seconds. The windows will
then lower fully. Pressing " again
will cause window movement to
stop. This feature may be turned off
by your dealer.
This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating,
except from the driver position.
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod.
Press v { to activate the window
lockout. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate when
activated.
The rear door locks are also
disabled. See Safety Locks on
page 2‑13.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-23
If the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse) when the sunshade is
Rear Window Sunshade
extended, it will automatically close.
When the vehicle is shifted in
D (Drive), the sunshade will not
automatically extend. Press and
release the switch to extend the
sunshade.
Rear Passenger Door Sunshades
Attach it to the hooks at the top of
the window.
To close the sunshade, use the
handle to release it from the hooks
and roll it down.
On vehicles with a rear window
sunshade, the sunshade switch is
on the overhead console. The
sunshade only operates with the
ignition in ON/RUN/START.
To open the sunshade, press and
release the switch. The sunshade
will fully extend. To close the
sunshade, press and release the
switch again. The sunshade will fully
close.
If equipped, use the handle to pull
the sunshade up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Sunroof Switch
Sunshade Switch
Roof
Vent Feature: Press and hold the
Open/Close: Press and hold the
Sunroof
For vehicles equipped with a
front of ~ to vent the sunroof. The
sunshade will automatically open
approximately 38 cm (15 in). Press
front or rear of Q to open or close
the sunshade to the desired
position.
sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to
operate the sunroof and power
sunshade. See Ignition Positions on
page 9‑15 and Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑19.
and hold the rear of ~ to close
the vent.
Express Open/Express Close:
Press and release the rear or front
of Q to express open or express
close the sunshade. If the sunroof is
opened, the sunshade will express
close within a few inches of the
opened sunroof.
Comfort Stop Feature: The
sunroof has a comfort stop feature
that stops the sunroof from opening
fully. Press and release the rear of
~ to open the sunroof to the
comfort open position. Pressing the
Anti-Pinch Feature
rear of ~ again will open the
sunroof fully. If the sunshade is not
fully open when the comfort stop
feature is pressed the second time,
the sunshade will open fully.
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof/sunshade when it is closing,
the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof/
sunshade from closing at the point
of the obstruction. The sunroof/
sunshade will then return to the
full-open position. To close the
sunroof/sunshade, see “Express
Open/Express Close” earlier in this
section.
Express Close: Press and release
the front of ~ to express close the
sunroof.
1. ~ Sunroof Switch
2. Q Sunshade Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-25
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-1
Seats and
Restraints
Passenger Sensing
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
How to Wear Safety Belts
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35
Replacing Airbag System
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-5
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated and Ventilated Front
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-40
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-42
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Replacing LATCH System
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-24
When Should an Airbag
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Rear Seats
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Rear Seat
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Securing Child Restraints
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 3-13
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Seats and Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button located on the side of the
head restraint, push the head
restraint down, and release the
button. Pull and push on the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
Head Restraints
WARNING
{
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Front Seats
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
The head restraint can be adjusted
forward or rearward. To adjust the
head restraint forward, grasp the
head restraint and pull it forward to
the desired locking position. To
adjust the head restraint rearward,
press the button located on the side
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-3
of the head restraint and move the
head restraint rearward until the
desired locking position is reached.
Try to move the head restraint after
the button is released to make sure
that it is locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Rear Seats
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The head restraint can be folded
forward to allow for better visibility
when the rear seat is unoccupied.
To fold the head restraint, press the
button on the side of the head
restraint.
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Seats and Restraints
When an occupant or child restraint
is in the seat, always return the
head restraint to the upright
position. Pull the head restraint up
and push it rearward until it locks
into place. Push and pull on the
head restraint to make sure that it is
locked.
Front Seats
Power Seat Adjustment
WARNING
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Always adjust the head restraint so
that the top of the restraint is at the
same height as the top of the
occupant's head.
The head restraint will fold forward
automatically.
Rear outboard head restraints are
not designed to be removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-5
To adjust the seat:
Lumbar Adjustment
Thigh Support
Adjustment
.
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.
Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑6.
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3‑5.
To adjust the lumbar support:
.
If available, adjust the manual leg
extension by pulling up on the lever,
and then pulling or pushing on the
support to lengthen or shorten it.
Release the lever to lock it in place.
Press and hold the control
forward to increase or rearward
to decrease lumbar support.
Some vehicles are equipped with a
feature that activates a vibration in
the driver seat to help the driver
avoid crashes. See Driver
.
Press and hold the control
Assistance Systems on page 9‑43.
upward to raise or downward to
lower the height of the lumbar
support.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Seats and Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING
{
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
The lap belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
To adjust the seatback:
.
Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
to raise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-7
driver Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter when the ignition is
placed in OFF/LOCK. These
automatically stored positions are
referred to as RKE Memory
positions. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3.
To save positions into Button
Memory Seats
Memory for the B (Exit) button and
easy exit features:
1. Adjust the driver seat, power tilt
and telescoping steering column,
and the outside mirrors on some
vehicles to the desired positions
for getting out of the vehicle.
Storing Button Memory Positions
2. Press and hold SET and B at
the same time until a beep
sounds.
To save positions into Button
Memory for the “1” and “2” driving
positions:
Recalling Button Memory
Positions
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside
mirrors, and the power tilt and
telescoping steering column to
the desired driving positions.
If available, the SET, "1," "2," and
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
are used to manually save and
recall memory settings for the driver
seat, outside mirrors, and power tilt
and telescoping steering column.
These manually stored positions are
referred to as Button Memory
positions.
Press and hold "1," "2," or B to
recall the Button Memory positions.
2. Press and hold SET and “1” at
the same time until a beep
sounds.
Releasing "1,” "2," or B before the
stored positions are reached stops
the recall.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a
If the ignition is in ON/RUN/START
and the vehicle is parked, briefly
second driver using “2.”
press and release “1,” “2,” or B to
recall the Button Memory positions.
Placing the ignition in OFF/LOCK
before the stored positions are
reached stops the recall.
The vehicle will also automatically
save driver seat, outside mirror, and
power tilt and telescoping steering
column positions to the current
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Seats and Restraints
.
Press the lock/unlock button on
the outside driver door handle
and open the driver door. The
RKE transmitter must be present
for the recall to activate.
If something has blocked the driver
seat and/or power tilt and
Recalling RKE Memory Positions
(Auto Memory Recall)
telescoping steering column while
recalling a memory position, the
recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold the
appropriate manual control for the
memory item that is not recalling for
two seconds. Try recalling the
memory position again by pressing
the appropriate memory button.
If the memory position is still not
recalling, see your dealer for
service.
The Auto (Automatic) Memory
Recall feature automatically recalls
the previously stored RKE Memory
positions for the current driver when
entering the vehicle.
To activate the recall when On - At
Ignition On is selected in the vehicle
personalization menu:
Depending upon the Auto Memory
Recall feature enabled in the vehicle
personalization menu, RKE Memory
positions are recalled in the
following ways:
.
Place the ignition in ON/RUN/
START.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
To activate the recall when
On - Driver Door Open is selected in
the personalization menu, do one of
the following:
To stop recall movement, press one
of the memory, power mirror,
or power seat controls; or press the
power tilt and telescoping steering
column control. If On - At Ignition
On is selected in the vehicle
Storing RKE Memory Positions
Every time the ignition is placed in
OFF/LOCK, the vehicle will
automatically store the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and power tilt and
telescoping steering column
positions to the RKE transmitter
used to start the vehicle. These
positions are called RKE Memory
positions and may be different than
the previously mentioned Button
Memory positions saved to the “1,”
.
Press K on the RKE transmitter
and open the driver door.
personalization menu, placing the
ignition in OFF also stops the recall.
.
Press K on the RKE transmitter
when the driver door is
already open.
If something has blocked the driver
seat and/or the power tilt and
telescoping steering column while
recalling a memory position, the
recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold the
appropriate manual control for the
“2,” and B buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
WARNING (Continued)
3-9
.
The vehicle is turned off with the
driver door open.
memory item that is not recalling for
two seconds. Try recalling the
memory position again by opening
If something has blocked the driver
seat and/or power tilt and
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
the driver door and pressing K on
the RKE transmitter. If the memory
position is still not recalling, see
your dealer for service.
telescoping steering column while
recalling the exit position, the recall
may stop. Remove the obstruction;
then press and hold the appropriate
manual control for the exit feature
not recalling for two seconds. Try
recalling the exit position again.
If the exit position is still not
recalling, see your dealer for
service.
Easy Exit Recall
If programmed on in the vehicle
personalization menu, the easy exit
feature automatically moves the
driver seat, power tilt and
telescoping steering column, and
outside mirrors on some vehicles to
the Button Memory positions saved
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
to the B (Exit) button. See “Storing
Button Memory Positions” in this
section and Vehicle Personalization
on page 5‑45.
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
Easy exit recall automatically
activates when one of the following
occurs:
.
The vehicle is turned off and the
driver door is opened within a
short time.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
Seats and Restraints
If available, the buttons are near the
climate controls on the center stack.
To operate, the ignition must be in
ON/RUN/START.
on high, the level may automatically
be lowered after approximately
30 minutes.
The heated or ventilated seats will
not turn on during a remote start
unless they are enabled in the
vehicle personalization menu. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑8
and Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Press J or z to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
Remote Start Heated and
Ventilated Seats
Press C or { to ventilate the driver
During a remote start, the heated or
ventilated seats, if equipped, can be
turned on automatically. When it is
cold outside, the heated seats turn
on, and when it is hot outside the
ventilated seats turn on. The heated
or ventilated seats are canceled
when the ignition is turned on. Press
the heated or ventilated seat button
to use the heated or ventilated seats
after the vehicle is started.
or passenger seat.
When this feature is off, the heated
and ventilated seat symbols on the
buttons are white. A ventilated seat
has a fan that pulls or pushes air
through the seat. The air is not
cooled. When a heated seat is
turned on, the symbol turns red.
When a ventilated seat is turned on,
the symbol turns blue.
The heated or ventilated seat
indicator lights do not turn on during
a remote start.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The indicator lights
next to the buttons indicate three for
the highest setting and one for the
lowest. If the front heated seats are
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Raising the Seatback
3-11
To fold the seatback:
Rear Seats
Folding the Seatback
WARNING
{
On some vehicles, either side of the
seatback can be folded for more
cargo space. Fold a seatback only
when the vehicle is not moving.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
WARNING
{
1. Pull the lever on top of the
seatback to unlock it.
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
A red tab near the seatback
lever raises when the seatback
is unlocked.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Repeat the steps to fold the
other seatback, if desired.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
Seats and Restraints
To raise a seatback:
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
other seatback, if desired.
Locking and Unlocking the
Seatback
1. Lift the seatback up and push it
rearward to lock it in place.
When the seatback is locked, the
seatback release lever will not work.
The seatbacks cannot be folded
down when the seatback lock is
engaged.
The rear seatbacks can be locked
or unlocked using the vehicle key.
A red tab near the seatback
lever retracts when the seatback
is locked in place.
To lock or unlock a seatback:
2. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked
into position.
Heated Rear Seats
3. Repeat the steps to raise the
other seatback, if necessary.
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns.
See the Warning under Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3‑9.
When the seat is not in use, it
should be kept in the upright, locked
position.
1. Insert the vehicle key into the
lock next to the seatback release
lever.
2. Turn the key toward the front of
the vehicle to lock or unlock the
seatback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-13
On vehicles without rear climate
controls, press the button again to
turn this feature off. The light on the
button will turn off. On vehicles with
rear climate controls, this feature
turns on at the highest setting. With
each press of the button, the heated
seat changes to the next lower
setting, and then the off setting.
Three lights indicate the highest
setting, and one light indicates the
lowest.
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door
Rear Heated Seat Buttons with
Rear Climate Controls Shown,
Base Similar
If available, the buttons are on the
rear of the center console.
Some vehicles have a rear seat
pass-through door in the center of
the rear seatback. Fold down the
center armrest and pull the latch to
open the door.
With the ignition in ON/RUN/START,
press M or L to heat the left or right
outboard seat cushion and
The pass-through door can be
locked or unlocked using the knob
on the back of the door. Open the
trunk to access the lock. Turn the
seatback. On vehicles without rear
climate controls, an indicator light
on the button will turn on when the
heated seat is on. On vehicles with
rear climate controls, an indicator on
the climate control display appears
when this feature is on.
knob toward Q to lock the door or
away from Q to unlock the door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
Seats and Restraints
Why Safety Belts Work
Safety Belts
WARNING (Continued)
This section of the manual
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
passengers to ride in any area of
the vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts.
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
WARNING
{
Always wear a safety belt, and
check that all passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much
worse than if you are wearing
safety belts. You can be seriously
injured or killed by hitting things
inside the vehicle harder or by
being ejected from the vehicle. In
addition, anyone who is not
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑15.
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
as fast as the vehicle does. If the
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
going until something stops you.
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
When you wear a safety belt, you
and the vehicle slow down together.
There is more time to stop because
you stop over a longer distance and,
when worn properly, your strongest
bones take the forces from the
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-15
safety belts. That is why wearing
safety belts makes such good
sense.
Also, in nearly all states and in
all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
There are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller
children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older
Children on page 3‑36 or Infants
and Young Children on page 3‑38.
Follow those rules for everyone's
protection.
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
during and after a crash, so you
can unbuckle and get out, is
.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front
of you.
much greater if you are belted.
.
.
Always use the correct buckle
for your seating position.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
Wear the lap part of the belt low
and snug on the hips, just
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection.
touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your
There are important things to know
about wearing a safety belt properly.
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
Seats and Restraints
.
Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
WARNING
{
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
You can be seriously injured,
or even killed, by not wearing
your safety belt properly.
.
Never allow the lap or
shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.
.
Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
your back.
.
Never route the lap or
shoulder belt over an
armrest.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-17
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑20.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Adjust the guide so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑15.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section for use and
important safety information.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
Seats and Restraints
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, if the
vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side
crash. If the vehicle has roof-rail
airbags, for the driver, front outboard
passenger, and second row
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear safety
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
Push down on the release button
and move the height adjuster to the
desired position. The adjuster can
be moved up by pushing the slide/
trim up.
outboard passengers, the
pretensioners can tighten the safety
belts in a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
the pretensioners and possibly other
parts of the safety belt system will
need to be replaced. See Replacing
Safety Belt System Parts after a
Crash on page 3‑21.
After the height adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into
position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-19
There is one guide for each outside
passenger position in the rear seat.
To install a comfort guide to the
safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
WARNING
{
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
Seats and Restraints
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. See the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
4. Buckle, position, and release the
safety belt as described
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-21
Safety System Check
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
WARNING (Continued)
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a
Crash
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑15.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑21.
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
Seats and Restraints
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Vehicles with an extended
wheelbase or without a rear seat
have the following airbags:
Airbag System
Vehicles with a standard wheelbase
and a factory installed rear seat
have the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑16.
and for the front outboard
passenger.
.
A frontal airbag for the driver
and for the front outboard
passenger.
.
A knee airbag for the driver and
for the front outboard passenger.
.
A knee airbag for the driver and
.
A seat-mounted side impact
for the front outboard passenger.
airbag for the driver and the front
outboard passenger.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver and the front
outboard passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and front outboard passenger.
.
Seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the second row
outboard passengers.
All vehicle airbags have the word
AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
near the deployment opening.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the center of the
steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front
outboard passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the front
outboard passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the front outboard
passenger.
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
is on the lower part of the
instrument panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-23
For seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
side of the seatback closest to
the door.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
in every crash. In some crashes
safety belts are the only restraint.
See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑26.
seriously injured or killed. Do not
sit unnecessarily close to any
airbag, as you would be if sitting
on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
For roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce the chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or
being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly, whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
WARNING
{
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt, even
with airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to inflate
WARNING
{
Because airbags inflate with great
force and faster than the blink of
an eye, anyone who is up
against, or very close to any
airbag when it inflates can be
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
Seats and Restraints
Where Are the Airbags?
WARNING
{
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in the
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑36 or Infants
and Young Children on
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑16 for more
information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
center of the steering wheel.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel.
page 3‑38.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-25
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,
Passenger Side Similar
The driver knee airbag is below the
steering column. The front outboard
passenger knee airbag is below the
glove box.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and front
outboard passenger are in the side
of the seatbacks closest to the door.
The second row seat-mounted side
impact airbags, for vehicles with a
standard wheelbase and a factory
installed rear seat, are in the sides
of the rear seatback closest to
the door.
The roof-rail airbags, for vehicles
with a standard wheelbase and a
factory installed rear seat, are in the
ceiling above the side windows for
the driver, front outboard passenger,
and second row outboard
passengers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
Seats and Restraints
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
WARNING
{
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
The vehicle has frontal airbags,
knee airbags, seat-mounted side
impact airbags, and roof-rail
airbags. See Airbag System on
page 3‑22. These airbags are
designed to inflate if the impact
exceeds the specific airbag
system’s deployment threshold.
Deployment thresholds are used to
predict how severe a crash is likely
to be in time for the airbags to
inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Deployment thresholds
can vary with specific vehicle
design.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
The roof-rail airbags, for vehicles
with an extended wheelbase or
vehicles without a factory installed
rear seat, are in the ceiling above
the front row side windows, for the
driver and front outboard
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries, mainly to the driver's or
front outboard passenger's head
and chest.
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie‐down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
passenger only.
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-27
It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags and frontal knee
airbags are not intended to inflate
during vehicle rollovers, in rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
The roof-rail airbags in vehicles with
an extended wheelbase and in
vehicles without a factory installed
rear seat are not intended to inflate
during a rollover.
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds depending on
whether the vehicle hits an object
straight on or at an angle, and
whether the object is fixed or
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
or wide.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags and roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to
severe side crashes depending on
the location of the impact.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to inflate on the side of
the vehicle that is struck. Both
roof-rail airbags will inflate when
either side of the vehicle is struck.
In addition, the roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in a severe frontal
impact.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
airbags are not intended to inflate in
rear impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
vehicle damage or repair costs.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
The roof-rail airbags in vehicles with
a standard wheelbase and a factory
installed rear seat will also inflate if
the sensing system predicts that the
vehicle is about to roll over on
its side.
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal knee airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal impacts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
Seats and Restraints
For airbag location, see Where Are
the Airbags? on page 3‑24.
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑26.
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
WARNING
{
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
What Will You See after
an Airbag Inflates?
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts by
distributing the force of the impact
more evenly over the
After the frontal airbags and
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they inflate. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbags, see Where Are the
occupant's body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
Airbags? on page 3‑24.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-29
.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps, turn on the
hazard warning flashers, and shut
off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps, and turn off
the hazard warning flashers by
using the controls for those
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the front outboard
passenger airbag.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the front
outboard passenger position. The
passenger airbag status indicator
will light on the overhead console
when the vehicle is started.
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for the vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
features.
WARNING
{
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑14 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑14.
United States
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-30
Seats and Restraints
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag should be allowed
to inflate or not.
WARNING
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the passenger frontal
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
passenger frontal airbag inflates
and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in a correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
Canada
The words ON and OFF or the
symbol for on and off will be visible
during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the
word ON or OFF, or the symbol for
on and off will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑17.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger airbag(s), no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
inflate under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag, under certain conditions. No
other airbag is affected by the
passenger sensing system.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag inflates.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly seated
occupant and determine if the front
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-31
.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
off the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag and knee airbag,
depending upon the person’s
seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
WARNING (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbags are off. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑17.
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front outboard passenger
seat, always move the seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
WARNING
{
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on the front
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the front
outboard passenger airbag and
knee airbag if:
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front outboard
passenger seat.
.
The front outboard passenger
seat is unoccupied.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to
be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit as a reminder that the
airbags are active.
.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
restraint.
.
A front outboard passenger
For some children, including
takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-32
Seats and Restraints
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
by the child restraint
If a person of adult size is sitting in
the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. Use the
following steps to allow the system
to detect that person and enable the
front outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag:
manufacturer and refer to
6. Restart the vehicle.
Securing Child Restraints (Front
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑52
or Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) on page 3‑49.
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
airbags for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child's seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-33
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers, a
laptop, or other electronic
devices.
in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
lit, and the airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel will also
be lit.
.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
Liquid pooled on the seat that
has not soaked in may make it
more likely that the passenger
sensing system will turn on the
passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag while a
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger
frontal airbag and passenger
knee airbag are turned on, the
on indicator will be lit.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑34 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
.
The passenger sensing system
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
may turn off the passenger
frontal airbag and passenger
knee airbag when liquid is
soaked into the seat. If this
happens, the off indicator will be
or other electronic device, is put on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-34
Seats and Restraints
an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired, remove the object from
the seat.
diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, roof-rail airbag
modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, side
impact sensors, or airbag wiring.
WARNING
{
For up to 10 seconds after the
vehicle is turned off and the
WARNING
{
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Your dealer and the service manual
have information about the location
of the airbag sensors, sensing and
diagnostic module, and airbag
wiring.
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
front outboard passenger position,
which includes sensors that are part
of the passenger seat. The
passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
GM covers, upholstery, or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any
object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This
could either prevent proper
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding accessories that change the
vehicle's frame, bumper system,
height, front end, or side sheet
metal, may keep the airbag system
from working properly. The
operation of the airbag system can
also be affected by changing or
moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑11.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-35
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly
turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑29.
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑16.
WARNING (Continued)
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbags, see
Where Are the Airbags? on
page 3‑24. See your dealer for
service.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
airbags, see Different Size Tires
and Wheels on page 10‑51 for
additional important information.
If you have to modify your vehicle
because you have a disability and
you have questions about whether
the modifications will affect the
vehicle's airbag system, or if you
have questions about whether the
airbag system will be affected if the
vehicle is modified for any other
reason, call Customer Assistance.
See Customer Assistance Offices
on page 13‑3.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash
WARNING
{
page 5‑16.
A crash can damage the airbag
systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
not work properly and may not
protect you and your
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-36
Seats and Restraints
.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
The manufacturer instructions that
come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the fit test below:
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑16. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑16.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-37
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
WARNING (Continued)
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
Never allow more than one child
to wear the same safety belt. The
safety belt cannot properly spread
the impact forces. In a crash, they
can be crushed together and
seriously injured. A safety belt
must be used by only one person
at a time.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-38
Seats and Restraints
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Infants and Young
Children
WARNING (Continued)
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
WARNING
{
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-39
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
WARNING (Continued)
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
WARNING
{
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. In a
crash, if an infant is in a
rear-facing child restraint, the
crash forces can be distributed
across the strongest part of an
infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always
be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
WARNING
{
The restraint manufacturer
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-40
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING (Continued)
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with the
harness.
Rear-Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-41
Children can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Booster Seats
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
A booster seat is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑43.
In some areas of the United States
and Canada, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-42
Seats and Restraints
Administration (NHTSA) website to
locate the nearest child safety seat
inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
WARNING (Continued)
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great if the
airbag deploys.
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
WARNING
{
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑29 for additional
information.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-43
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
rear-facing child restraint should not
be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to or
interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
In order to use the LATCH system in
the vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system secures a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
LATCH attachments on the child
restraint are used to attach the child
restraint to the anchors in the
vehicle. This system is designed to
make installation of a child restraint
easier.
If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, a
attachments in the vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-44
Seats and Restraints
The child restraint may have a
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
Either will have a single
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the child
restraint.
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are two
lower anchors for each LATCH
seating position that will
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (2).
attachment (2) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-45
To assist in locating the lower
anchors, each rear anchor position
has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
The top tether anchors are under
the covers, behind the rear seat, on
the filler panel. Be sure to use an
anchor on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
To assist in locating the top tether
anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is on the cover.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑42 for
Rear Seat
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-46
Seats and Restraints
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
of the retractor to set the lock,
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
WARNING
{
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
WARNING
{
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
If you need to secure more than one
child restraint in the rear seat, see
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑42.
You cannot secure three child
restraints using the LATCH anchors
in the rear seat at the same time,
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-47
but you can install two of them.
If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the right
rear seating position, and install the
other one either in the left rear
seating position or in the center
seating position. If you need to
install child restraints in both the
center and left rear seating
positions, the one in the center
seating position will need to be
secured using the vehicle safety
belts instead of the LATCH anchors.
There are five lower LATCH anchors
in the rear seat.
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
.
Use anchors 1 and 2 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in the right rear seating
position.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
.
Use anchors 3 and 4 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in the center rear seating
position.
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to the
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
.
Use anchors 4 and 5 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in the left rear seating
position.
Refer to the following illustration to
learn which anchors to use.
Installing child restraints using
LATCH in the center and left rear
seating positions at the same time is
prohibited.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
1.2. For outboard rear seating
positions, put the head
restraint in the upright
position. See Head
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Restraints on page 3‑2.
1.3. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-48
Seats and Restraints
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according to
the child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose
the anchor.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-49
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest or
head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint and around
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
WARNING (Continued)
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
head restraint posts.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
movement for proper installation.
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
WARNING
{
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
compatible with this vehicle.
tether under the headrest or
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-50
Seats and Restraints
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑43 for how and
where to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑43 for top tether anchor
locations.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑42.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
For outboard rear seat positions,
put the head restraint in the
upright position. See Head
Restraints on page 3‑2.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-51
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑43.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-52
Seats and Restraints
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑42.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
front passenger airbag inflates
and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑29 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑17 for more information,
including important safety
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑29 for additional
information.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑43 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑43 for
top tether anchor locations.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-53
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when the
vehicle is started. See
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑17.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-54
Seats and Restraints
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in
the passenger airbag status
indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑29.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-1
Storage
Compartments
Storage
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
If equipped with storage behind the
climate control system, touch the
bottom of the climate control system
panel to open. There is a USB port
and auxiliary jack inside. See the
infotainment manual.
To access, push on the cover and
release.
Keep the storage area closed when
not in use.
Touch the bottom of the climate
control system panel to close.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Storage
Glove Box
Armrest Storage
Center Console Storage
Rear
To open, touch the button. The
glove box has a compact disc player
and MP3 connection inside.
Push the button and lift to access
the storage area. There is a power
outlet, auxiliary jack, and SD card
port inside. See Power Outlets on
page 5‑6 and the infotainment
manual.
Pull the armrest down and pull up
on the lever to access the
storage area.
There are cupholders in the rear
armrest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-3
Push the cover forward to access.
To close, push the cover again and
release.
The center console has a storage
area in the rear of the console.
Press and release the door to
access. Push the door to close.
There are power outlets under the
storage areas. See Power Outlets
on page 5‑6.
There are cupholders in the center
console. Push and release on the
passenger side of the cover to
access the cupholders.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Storage
Cargo Management
System
Convenience Net
The vehicle may have a
Additional Storage
Features
convenience net in the trunk. The
net is attached to the cargo
tie-downs. Put small loads behind
the net. It can also be positioned
into an envelope to hold smaller
items inside. Do not use the net for
heavy loads.
Cargo Tie-Downs
To open the cargo management
system, push down on the rear of
the handle, then lift the handle up.
The cargo tie-downs can be used to
secure small loads and the
convenience net. See Convenience
Net on page 4‑4, if equipped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-1
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18
Malfunction
Adaptive Forward Lighting
Instruments and
Controls
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Electric Parking Brake
Controls
Information Displays
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-31
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Service Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-23
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-23
Traction Control System
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-35
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-36
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Engine Cooling System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Engine Coolant Temperature
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-37
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-38
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-38
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-38
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Object Detection System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-24
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-26
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Instruments and Controls
Ride Control System
Steering Wheel Controls
Controls
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Steering Wheel
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-43 Adjustment
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-44
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-45
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-45
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Vehicle Personalization
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-45
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-51
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Universal Remote System
Press the control to move the tilt
and telescoping steering wheel up
and down or forward and rearward.
g (Push to Talk): For vehicles with
OnStar® or a Bluetooth system,
press to talk or interact with those
systems. See OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1 or “Bluetooth” in the
separate infotainment manual.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Horn
5-3
c (End Call): Press to decline an
incoming call, or end a current call.
Press to mute or unmute the
infotainment system when not on
a call.
C or B (Next or Previous
Favorite): Press to go to the next
or previous favorite radio station or
CD/MP3 track.
Press a on the steering wheel pad
to sound the horn.
x + or x − (Volume): Press to
Windshield Wiper/Washer
increase or decrease the volume.
Heated Steering Wheel
With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
move the windshield wiper lever to
select the wiper speed.
HI: Use for fast wipes.
LO: Use for slow wipes.
S or T (Previous or Next): Press
to go to the previous or next menu
option.
( (Heated Steering Wheel): For
vehicles equipped with a heated
steering wheel, press to turn on or
off. A light next to the button
displays when the feature is
turned on.
y or z (Next or Previous): Move
SEL up or down to go to the next or
previous selection.
The steering wheel takes about
three minutes to start heating.
SEL (Select): Press to select a
highlighted menu option.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Instruments and Controls
INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move
the lever up to INT for intermittent
If the windshield wiper lever is then
moved to OFF before the driver
door is opened or within 10 minutes,
the wipers will restart and move to
the base of the windshield.
wipes, then turn the x INT band
up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.
If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are performing wipes due to
windshield washing, the wipers
continue to run until they reach the
base of the windshield.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
.
.
.
Turn the band up for more
sensitivity to moisture.
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly
move the wiper lever down. For
several wipes, hold the wiper
lever down.
Turn the band down for less
sensitivity to moisture.
Rainsense™
Move the windshield wiper lever
out of the INT position to
deactivate Rainsense.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades and windshield before using
them. If frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
Damaged blades should be
For vehicles with Rainsense, a
sensor near the top center of the
windshield detects the amount of
water on the windshield and
controls the frequency of the
windshield wiper.
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
When using an automatic car wash,
move the windshield wiper lever to
OFF. This disables the automatic
Rainsense windshield wipers.
replaced. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑22.
Keep this area of the windshield
clear of debris to allow for best
system performance.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor.
With Rainsense, if the transmission
is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle
speed is very slow, the wipers will
automatically stop at the base of the
windshield.
Wiper Parking
INT (Rainsense Wipe Sensitivity
Control): Move the windshield
If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they
will immediately stop.
wiper lever to INT. Turn the x INT
band on the wiper lever to adjust the
sensitivity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Clock
5-5
The wiper operations return to
normal when the transmission is no
longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle
speed has increased.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass receives
its heading and other information
from the Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna,
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See “Home Page” in the
separate infotainment manual for
information about how to use the
menu system.
n L (Windshield Washer): Pull
the windshield wiper lever toward
you to spray windshield washer fluid
and activate the wipers. The wipers
will continue until the lever is
released or the maximum wash time
is reached. When the windshield
wiper lever is released, additional
wipes may occur depending on how
long the windshield washer had
been activated. See Washer Fluid
on page 10‑17 for information on
filling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speed
information.
Setting the Time
The compass system is designed to
operate for a certain number of
miles or degrees of turn before
needing a signal from the GPS
satellites. When the compass
display shows CAL, drive the
vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when a
GPS signal is restored and provide
a heading again. See Compass
Messages on page 5‑36 for the
messages that may be displayed for
the compass.
To set the time:
1. From the Home Page, press the
SETTINGS screen button and
press Time and Date.
2. Press Set Time and press + or −
to increase or decrease hours,
minutes, and AM or PM. Press
12Hr or 24Hr for 12 or 24 hour
clock.
WARNING
{
3. Press } to go back to the
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
previous menu.
To set the date:
1. Press the SETTINGS screen
button and press Time and Date.
windshield, blocking your vision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Instruments and Controls
.
On the rear of the center
console.
2. Press Set Date and press + or −
to increase or decrease month,
day, or year.
Power Outlet 110 Volt
Alternating Current
Lift the cover to access the
accessory power outlet.
The vehicle may have a power
outlet on the rear of the center
console. It can be used to plug in
electrical equipment that uses a
maximum limit of 150 watts.
3. Press } to go back to the
Certain accessory power plugs may
not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
previous menu.
To set the clock display:
1. Press the SETTINGS screen
button and press Time and Date.
2. Press Clock Display and press
OFF or ON to turn the clock
display off or on.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included with
the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑64.
3. Press } to go back to the
previous menu.
Notice: Hanging heavy
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
equipment from the power outlet
can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
An indicator light on the outlet turns
on to show it is in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
ON/RUN and equipment requiring
less than 150 watts is plugged into
the outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
The vehicle has three accessory
power outlets:
Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in
equipment that exceeds the
.
Inside the front storage area
below the climate control
system.
maximum 20 amps rating.
.
Inside the center console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-7
.
Other equipment requiring an
extremely stable power supply
such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc.
The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or
if the equipment is not fully seated
into the outlet.
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
If equipment is connected using
more than 150 watts or a system
fault is detected, a protection circuit
shuts off the power supply and the
indicator light turns off. To reset the
circuit, unplug the item and plug it
back in or turn the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) off and
then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
Cigarette Lighter
For vehicles with cigarette lighters,
they are under the climate control
system inside the storage area and
on the rear of the center console.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
To activate the cigarette lighter,
push it into the heating element and
let go. The lighter pops out when it
is ready to be used.
page 9‑19. The power restarts when
equipment using 150 watts or less is
plugged into the outlet and a system
fault is not detected.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
The power outlet is not designed for
and may not work properly, if the
following are plugged in:
.
Equipment with high initial peak
wattage such as:
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Instruments and Controls
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-9
Instrument Cluster
English Base Cluster Shown, Metric Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Instruments and Controls
English Uplevel Balanced Cluster Shown, Metric Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-11
Reconfigurable Instrument
Cluster
There are four uplevel instrument
cluster display configurations to
choose from: Simple, Performance,
Balanced, or Enhanced.
Performance Configuration
Balanced Configuration
The Performance configuration has
two interactive display zones: one in
the center of the speedometer and
one in the lower left of the cluster
screen.
The Balanced configuration has
three interactive display zones: one
in the center of each of the gauges.
Simple Configuration
The Simple configuration has one
interactive display zone in the
center.
Enhanced Configuration
The Enhanced configuration has
three interactive display zones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
Instruments and Controls
Use the five-way control on the right
side of the steering wheel to move
between the different display zones
and scroll through the different
displays.
Cluster Application Displays
Cluster Settings Menu
The cluster can display information
regarding Navigation, Audio, and
Phone.
To enter the cluster settings menu:
1. Use the five-way control on the
right side of the steering wheel
to find the Settings page in one
of the interactive display zones
on the cluster.
Navigation
To change the cluster configuration:
If there is no active route, a
compass will be displayed. If there
is an active route, press SEL to end
route guidance or turn the voice
prompts on or off.
1. Find the Settings page in one of
the interactive display zones on
the cluster.
2. Press SEL on the center of the
five-way control to enter the
Settings menu.
2. Press SEL to enter the
Settings menu.
Units: Press SEL while Units is
highlighted to enter the Unit menu.
Choose English or metric units by
pressing SEL while the desired item
is highlighted. A checkmark will be
displayed next to the selected item.
Audio
3. Scroll down to highlight Display
Layout. Then press SEL to
select it.
While the Audio application page is
displayed, press SEL to enter the
Audio menu. In the Audio menu,
search for music or change the
audio source.
4. Each layout in the menu is
represented by a small preview
image of the display layout.
Scroll up or down and highlight
the selection. Press SEL to
select the desired cluster
configuration.
Info Pages: Press SEL while Info
Pages is highlighted to select the
items to be displayed in the DIC info
displays. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
Phone
While the Phone application page is
displayed, press SEL to enter the
Phone menu. In the Phone menu,
if there is no active phone call, view
recent calls or scroll through
contacts. If there is an active call,
mute the phone or switch to handset
operation.
5. Exit the Display Layout menu by
Display Layout: Press SEL while
Display Layout is highlighted to
change the configuration of the
pressing S.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Fuel Gauge
The trip odometer can show how far
the vehicle has been driven since
the trip odometer was last reset.
5-13
uplevel cluster. See “Reconfigurable
Instrument Cluster” earlier in this
section.
Trip Odometer
Open Source Software: Press
SEL while Open Source Software is
highlighted to display open source
software information.
The trip odometer is accessed and
reset through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Base Level
Odometer
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new cluster installed, the new
odometer is set to the mileage of
the old odometer. If this is not
possible, it is set at zero and a label
is put on the driver door to show the
old mileage reading.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Instruments and Controls
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
.
At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
Uplevel Balanced Configuration,
Performance Similar
Uplevel Simple and Enhanced
Configurations
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge indicates about how much
fuel is left in the tank.
.
The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
.
The gauge takes a few seconds
There is an arrow near the fuel
gauge pointing to the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
When the indicator nears empty, the
low fuel light comes on. There still is
a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be refueled soon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-15
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
While driving under normal
operating conditions, if the needle
moves into the shaded area, the
engine is too hot. Pull off the road,
stop the vehicle, and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
English Base Level
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
cluster.
Metric Base Level
When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind the driver to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays
Uplevel Balanced Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
Instruments and Controls
on solid until the belt is buckled.
This cycle may continue several
times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
This cycle continues several times if
the passenger remains or becomes
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving.
module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 3‑22.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the chime nor the light
comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop, or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and/or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
The airbag readiness light comes on
for several seconds when the
vehicle is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed
immediately.
There is a passenger safety belt
reminder light near the passenger
airbag status indicator. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑29.
safety belt.
WARNING
{
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag
system. The system check includes
the airbag sensor(s), passenger
sensing system, the pretensioners,
the airbag modules, the wiring, and
the crash sensing and diagnostic
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind passengers to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays
on solid until the belt is buckled.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-17
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag are allowed to
inflate.
WARNING (Continued)
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
United States
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag.
If there is a problem with the airbag
system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
page 5‑43.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑29 for
important safety information. The
passenger airbag status indicator is
in the overhead console.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or the on or off symbol, to let you
know the status of the front
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Instruments and Controls
If the light stays on, or comes on
on when the vehicle is placed in
Service Only Mode, as a check to
show it is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. See Ignition Positions on
page 9‑15.
WARNING (Continued)
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
When this light comes on, or is
flashing, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) also displays a
message.
Charging System Light
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑35.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and diagnosis
and service might be required.
On some vehicles the charging
system light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on, but the
engine is not running, as a check to
show the light is working. It should
go out when the engine is started.
For vehicles with a reconfigurable
cluster, this light may not come on
when the ignition is turned on.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system also
assists the service technician in
correctly diagnosing any
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors the operation
of the vehicle to ensure emissions
are at acceptable levels, helping to
maintain a clean environment. The
malfunction indicator lamp comes
malfunction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-19
Notice: If the vehicle is
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
continually driven with this light
on, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle fuel
economy might not be as good,
and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
The following may correct an
emission control system
malfunction:
.
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
Make sure the capless funnel
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
adapter is removed, if fuel has
been added to the vehicle using
the capless funnel adapter. See
“Filling the Tank With a Portable
Gas Can” under Filling the Tank
on page 9‑57. The diagnostic
system can detect if the adapter
has been left installed in the
vehicle, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the
adapter removed should turn off
the light.
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, stop
and park the vehicle. Turn the
vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,
and restart the engine. If the light is
still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
.
Check that good quality fuel is
used. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause stalling after start-up,
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
Instruments and Controls
.
The OBD II (On-Board
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
emission system test equipment will
likely connect to the vehicle's Data
Link Connector (DLC).
Diagnostics) system determines
that critical emission control
systems have not been
completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not
ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It may require at least one full tank
of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑56.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer can check
the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
.
The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if
the vehicle is placed in Service
Only Mode and the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come
on. See your dealer for
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Depending on where you live, your
vehicle may be required to
participate in an emission control
system inspection and maintenance
program. For the inspection, the
assistance in verifying proper
operation of the malfunction
indicator lamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-21
brake is released, or while driving,
there is a problem with the electric
parking brake system or another
system. A message may also
display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Brake System
Messages on page 5‑35.
Brake System Warning
Light
WARNING
{
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your dealer.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
Service Electric Parking
Brake Light
Electric Parking Brake
Light
Metric
English
On some vehicles the service
electric parking brake light should
come on briefly when the vehicle is
in ON/RUN. If it does not come on,
have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn if there is a problem. For
This light comes on briefly when the
vehicle is turned on. If it does not
come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn if there is a
problem.
Metric
English
This light comes on when the
parking brake is applied. If the light
continues flashing after the parking
If the light comes on and stays on,
there is a base brake problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
Instruments and Controls
vehicles with the reconfigurable
cluster, this light may not come on
when the vehicle is in ON/RUN.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑21 and Brake System
Messages on page 5‑35.
If this light stays on, there is a
problem with a system on the
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off.
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Light
vehicle that is causing the parking
brake system to work at a reduced
level. The vehicle can still be driven,
but should be taken to a dealer as
soon as possible. See Electric
Parking Brake on page 9‑26. If a
message displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Brake
System Messages on page 5‑35.
If the light comes on while driving,
stop as soon as it is safely possible
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. A chime may
also sound when the light comes on
steady.
For some vehicles with the Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) system,
this light briefly comes on amber
while starting the vehicle. If it does
not, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
turns off. For vehicles with the
reconfigurable cluster, this light may
not come on when starting the
vehicle.
If the ABS light is the only light on,
the vehicle has regular brakes, but
the antilock brakes are not
functioning.
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
If both the ABS and the brake
system warning light are on, the
vehicle's antilock brakes are not
functioning and there is a problem
with the regular brakes. See your
dealer for service.
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
This light comes on green when the
system is on and ready to operate.
When the system determines that
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-23
the vehicle is leaving its lane
without using the turn signal, this
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
Traction Off Light
light will change to amber and flash.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑28 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑29.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9‑53.
Vehicle Ahead Indicator
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
turns off. For vehicles with a
reconfigurable cluster, this light is in
the display area and it may not
come on when the ignition is
turned on.
For vehicles with the Forward
Collision Alert (FCA) system, this
light displays green when a vehicle
is detected ahead. This light is
located in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) on vehicles with a
base cluster.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
button.
This light comes on when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off.
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction
Control System (TCS) is also off.
This light will display amber when
you are following a vehicle ahead
much too closely.
If the TCS is off, the system does
not assist in controlling the vehicle.
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
systems and the warning light
turns off.
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF
light come on when StabiliTrak is
turned off.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9‑47.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
Instruments and Controls
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑28 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑29.
feature(s) is no longer functioning
and whether the vehicle requires
service.
light goes off. For vehicles with the
reconfigurable cluster, this light may
not come on when starting the
vehicle.
If the indicator/warning light is on
and flashing, the TCS and/or the
StabiliTrak system is actively
working.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑29 and Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑28.
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
Notice: The engine coolant
temperature warning light
indicates that the vehicle has
overheated. Driving with this light
on can damage the engine and it
may not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Engine
Overheating on page 10‑14.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on when the
engine has overheated.
The StabiliTrak or Traction Control
System (TCS) indicator/warning
light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If this happens pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑14.
If the light does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
If the light is on and not flashing, the
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
system have been disabled. A DIC
message may display. Check the
DIC messages to determine which
On some vehicles this light comes
on briefly while starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by the dealer. If the system
is working normally the indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-25
When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Operation on page 10‑44.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
Engine Oil Pressure Light
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Check the oil level as soon as
possible. Add oil if required, but
if the oil level is within the
operating range and the oil
pressure is still low, have the
vehicle serviced. Always follow
the maintenance schedule for
changing engine oil.
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
When the Light Is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC)
tire pressure message may also
display. See Tire Messages on
page 5‑43. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure on page 10‑41.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
Instruments and Controls
Low Fuel Warning Light
Security Light
High-Beam On Light
This light is near the fuel gauge and
comes on briefly when the ignition is
turned on as a check to show it is
working. For vehicles with a
reconfigurable cluster, this light is in
the display area and may not come
on when the ignition is turned on.
On some vehicles the immobilizer
light should come on briefly as the
engine is started. If it does not come
on, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light turns off.
For vehicles with the reconfigurable
cluster, this light may not come on
when the engine is started.
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑3.
Automatic High-Beam Light
It also comes on when the fuel tank
is low on fuel. The light turns off
when fuel is added. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation
on page 2‑17.
This light comes on when the
automatic high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-27
Adaptive Cruise Control Light
Adaptive Forward
Lamps On Reminder
Lighting (AFL) Light
This light comes on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (if
equipped) is active. See Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 9‑34.
This light comes on when the
exterior lamps are in use. See
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
This light should come on briefly as
the vehicle is started. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer. For vehicles with a
reconfigurable cluster, this light is in
the display area and may not come
on when the ignition is turned on.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on solid when
there is a problem with the AFL
system. It flashes when the system
is switching between lighting
modes. See Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) on page 6‑5.
The cruise control light is white
when the cruise control is on and
ready, and turns green when the
cruise control is set and active.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
Instruments and Controls
Door Ajar Light
S or T : Press to move between
the interactive display zones in the
Information Displays
cluster. Press S to go back to the
previous menu.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC is displayed in the
instrument cluster. It shows the
status of many vehicle systems.
SEL (Select): Press to open a
menu or select a menu item. Press
and hold to reset values on certain
screens.
DIC Information Display
Options
The info displays on the DIC can be
turned on or off through the
Settings menu.
For vehicles equipped with this light,
it comes on when a door is open or
not securely latched. Before driving,
check that all doors are properly
closed. See Door Ajar Messages on
page 5‑36 for more information.
1. Press SEL while viewing the
Settings page in one of the
interactive display zones on the
cluster.
2. Scroll to Info Pages and
press SEL.
3. Press y or z to move through
y or z : Move SEL up or down to
the list of possible info displays.
go to the previous or next selection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-29
4. Press SEL while an item is
highlighted to select or deselect
that item. When an item is
selected, a checkmark will
appear next to it.
The Average Fuel Economy display
shows the approximate average
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
or miles per gallon (mpg). This
number is calculated based on the
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded
since the last time this menu item
was reset. The Average Fuel
Economy can be reset along with
the trip odometer by pressing and
holding SEL while this display is
active.
calculated based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
The Average Fuel Economy can be
reset by pressing and holding SEL
while this display is active.
DIC Information Displays
Instantaneous Fuel Economy:
The Instantaneous Fuel Economy
display shows the current fuel
economy in either liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles
per gallon (mpg). This number
reflects only the fuel economy that
the vehicle has right now and
changes frequently as driving
conditions change.
The following is the list of all
possible DIC information displays.
Some of the information displays
may not be available for your
particular vehicle.
Fuel Range: The Fuel Range
display shows the approximate
distance the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. LOW will be
displayed when the vehicle is low
on fuel. The fuel range estimate is
based on an average of the
vehicle's fuel economy over recent
driving history and the amount of
fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
Speed (Base Cluster): The digital
speedometer shows the vehicle
speed in either kilometers per
hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Average Speed: The Average
Speed display shows the average
speed of the vehicle in kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). This average is
calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset of this value. The average
speed can be reset by pressing and
holding SEL while this display is
active.
Trip 1 or Trip 2 (Base
Cluster) / Trip 1 or Trip 2 and
Average Fuel Economy (Uplevel
Cluster): The Trip display shows
the current distance traveled, in
either kilometers (km) or miles (mi),
since the trip odometer was last
reset. The trip odometer can be
reset by pressing and holding SEL
while this display is active.
Average Fuel Economy (Base
Cluster): The Average Fuel
Economy display shows the
approximate average liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles
per gallon (mpg). This number is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
Instruments and Controls
Timer: This display can be used as
a timer. To start the timer, press SEL
while this display is active. The
display will show the amount of time
that has passed since the timer was
last reset. To stop the timer, press
SEL briefly while this display is
active and the timer is running. To
reset the timer to zero, press and
hold SEL while this display is active.
Speed Limit: The Speed Limit
display shows the current speed
limit. The information for this page
comes from a roadway database.
Oil Life: The Oil Life display shows
an estimate of the oil's remaining
useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE
99% is displayed, that means 99%
of the current oil life remains.
Speed Warning: The Speed
Warning display allows the driver to
set a speed that they do not want to
exceed. To set the Speed Warning,
press SEL when Speed Warning is
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑37. The oil should be
changed as soon as possible. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑6. In addition
to the engine oil life system
displayed. Press y or z to adjust
the value. This feature can be
turned off by pressing and holding
SEL while viewing this page. If the
selected speed limit is exceeded, a
pop-up warning is displayed and a
chime may sound.
Compass: The Compass display
shows the direction the vehicle is
driving.
monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended. See
Maintenance Schedule on
Turn Arrow: The Turn Arrow
display shows the next maneuver
when using route guidance.
page 11‑3.
Cruise Set Speed: The Cruise Set
Speed display shows the speed the
cruise control or Adaptive Cruise
Control is set to.
Travel Time: The Travel Time
display shows the estimated time
duration remaining for the current
route.
Remember, the Oil Life display must
be reset after each oil change. It will
not reset itself. Also, be careful not
to reset the Oil Life display
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, press and
hold SEL for several seconds while
Battery Voltage: The Battery
Voltage display shows the current
battery voltage.
Distance to Destination: The
Distance to Destination display
shows the distance to the
destination when using route
guidance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-31
the Oil Life display is active. See
Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑9.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45 and “Settings” under
Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
WARNING
{
Tire Pressure: The Tire Pressure
display shows the approximate
pressures of all four tires. Tire
pressure is displayed in either
kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per
square inch (psi). If the pressure is
low, the value for that tire is shown
in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑43 and Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑44.
If the HUD image is too bright or
too high in your field of view, it
may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is
dark outside. Be sure to keep the
HUD image dim and placed low in
your field of view.
For vehicles with HUD, some
information concerning the
operation of the vehicle is projected
onto the windshield. The images are
projected through the HUD lens on
the instrument panel.
Maintenance Required: This
display shows how many kilometers
(miles) until the next maintenance is
needed.
HUD Display on the Vehicle
Windshield
The HUD information appears as an
image focused out toward the front
of the vehicle.
Blank Page: The Blank Page
display allows for no information to
be displayed in the cluster info
display areas.
The HUD information can be
displayed in various languages. The
speedometer reading and other
numerical values can be displayed
in either English or metric units.
The HUD may display different
alerts and information for vehicles
equipped with these features:
.
The language selection is changed
through the radio and the units of
measurement is changed through
the instrument cluster.
Traction Control System (TCS)
.
StabiliTrak System
.
Collision Alert
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
Instruments and Controls
.
Gap Adjust
The HUD control is to the left of the
steering wheel.
There are four views in the HUD
display:
.
.
.
Upcoming Maneuver from
OnBoard Navigation
To adjust the HUD image:
1. Adjust the driver seat.
2. Start the engine.
Upcoming Maneuver from
OnStar
Incoming Call
Use the following settings to adjust
the HUD.
When the HUD is on, the
speedometer reading is continually
displayed, except when an imminent
navigation maneuver is being
shown. The current audio, phone,
or navigation alert temporarily
displays if their status changes. This
occurs if the steering wheel controls
are used to adjust a setting or
acknowledge an alert.
Metric
$ (Image Adjustment): Press
down or lift up to center the HUD
image. The HUD image can only be
adjusted up and down, not side
to side.
! (Display View): Press to
select the display view. Release
when the desired display is shown
on the HUD. If vehicle messages
are displayed, pressing the DIC
select button may clear the
English
Speed View: This display gives the
speedometer reading (in English or
metric units), speed limit, Adaptive
Cruise Control speed, Lane
Departure Warning, and Vehicle
Ahead indicator. Some information
only appears on vehicles that have
these features, and when they are
active.
message. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
D (Brightness): Lift up and hold
to brighten the display. Press down
and hold to dim the display. Hold
down to turn the display off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-33
navigation information is provided to
the HUD by the navigation radio or
OnStar (if equipped).
Metric
Metric
Metric
English
English
Audio/Phone View: This displays
the speed view along with audio/
phone information. The current radio
station, media type, and incoming
calls will be displayed.
Navigation View: This displays the
speed view along with Turn-by-Turn
Navigation information. The
compass heading is displayed when
navigation routing is not active.
English
Performance View: This displays
the speedometer reading, rpm
reading, transmission positions, and
gear shift indicator.
All formats will briefly show the
Turn-by-Turn Navigation alerts and
provide details about the next
driving maneuver. When
approaching the next maneuver, the
HUD displays a distance bar. All
The HUD image will automatically
dim and brighten to compensate for
outside lighting. The HUD
brightness control can also be
adjusted as needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-34
Instruments and Controls
The HUD image can temporarily
light up depending on the angle and
position of the sunlight on the HUD
display. This is normal.
HUD Troubleshooting
Vehicle Messages
Check that:
Messages displayed on the DIC
indicate the status of the vehicle or
some action that may be needed to
correct a condition. Multiple
messages may display one after the
other.
.
Nothing is covering the
HUD lens.
Polarized sunglasses could make
the HUD image harder to see.
.
HUD brightness setting is not
too dim or too bright.
Care of the HUD
.
HUD is adjusted to the proper
The messages that do not require
immediate action can be
acknowledged and cleared by
pressing SEL. The messages that
require immediate action cannot be
cleared until that action is
performed. All messages should be
taken seriously and clearing the
messages does not correct the
problem.
Clean the inside of the windshield to
remove any dirt or film that could
reduce the sharpness or clarity of
the HUD image.
height.
.
Polarized sunglasses are
not worn.
.
Windshield and HUD lens are
Clean the HUD lens with a soft cloth
sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe
the lens gently, then dry it.
clean.
If the HUD image is not correct,
contact your dealer.
The windshield is part of the HUD
system. See Windshield
Replacement on page 10‑22.
The following are some of the
vehicle messages that may be
displayed depending on the vehicle
content.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-35
TRANSPORT MODE ON
STEP ON BRAKE TO
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
This message is displayed when the
vehicle is in transport mode. Some
features can be disabled while in
this mode, including Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE), remote start,
and the vehicle alarm system. Take
the vehicle to your dealer for service
to turn transport mode off.
This message is displayed if you
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
attempt to release the Electric
Parking Brake without the brake
pedal applied. See Electric Parking
Brake on page 9‑26.
This message displays when the
vehicle has detected that the battery
voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
system starts reducing features of
the vehicle that may be noticed. At
the point that features are disabled,
this message displays. Turn off
unnecessary accessories to allow
the battery to recharge.
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
This message is displayed if the
Electric Parking Brake is on while
the vehicle is in motion. See Electric
Parking Brake on page 9‑26.
Brake System Messages
BRAKE FLUID LOW
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake
Fluid on page 10‑18.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
LOW BATTERY
This message may be displayed
when there is a problem with the
brake boost assist system. The
brake boost assist motor may be
heard and brake pedal pulsation
may be felt. This is normal under
these conditions. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 10‑20.
BRAKES OVERHEATED
This message is displayed when the
brakes are becoming overheated.
This may be seen when driving on
hills. Shift to a lower gear.
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-36
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS
PEDAL APPLIED
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the parking
brake. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message displays when
attempting to activate Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) when it is
temporarily unavailable. The ACC
system does not need service.
This message displays when
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
active and the driver is pressing the
gas pedal. When this occurs, ACC
will not brake. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 9‑34.
Compass Messages
Dashes may be displayed if the
vehicle temporarily loses
communication with the Global
Positioning System (GPS).
This can occur under the following
conditions:
Door Ajar Messages
.
The radar is not clean. Keep the
radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
entire front and/or rear of the
vehicle. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10‑76.
DOOR OPEN
A door open symbol will be
Cruise Control Messages
displayed on the DIC showing which
door is open. If the vehicle has been
shifted out of P (Park), a DOOR
OPEN message will also be
displayed. If the vehicle is in manual
shift mode, the DOOR OPEN
message will be displayed if the
vehicle starts to move. Close the
door completely.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE SET
TO XXX
This message displays when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
speed is set. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 9‑34.
.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar object detection or
camera performance.
CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message displays when the
cruise control speed is set. See
Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
HOOD OPEN
This message will display along with
a hood open symbol when the hood
is open. Close the hood completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-37
TRUNK OPEN
COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD
COOLANT
HIGH COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
This message will display along with
a symbol when the trunk is open.
Close the trunk completely.
This message will display if the
coolant is low. See Engine Coolant
on page 10‑12.
This message displays if the coolant
temperature is hot. See Engine
Overheating on page 10‑14.
Engine Cooling System
Messages
ENGINE OVERHEATED —
IDLE ENGINE
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
ENGINE TEMP
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the Oil Life System.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑9, Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28, Engine
Oil on page 10‑6, and Maintenance
Schedule on page 11‑3.
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air
ENGINE OVERHEATED —
STOP ENGINE
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
conditioning compressor turns back
on. The vehicle can continue to be
driven.
ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays when the
engine oil temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-38
Instruments and Controls
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL
Engine Power Messages
Key and Lock Messages
On some vehicles, this message
displays when the engine oil level
may be too low. Check the oil level
before filling to the recommended
level. If the oil is not low and this
message remains on, take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑6.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
NO REMOTE KEY WAS
DETECTED PLACE KEY IN
TRANSMITTER POCKET THEN
START YOUR VEHICLE SEE
OWNER’S MANUAL FOR
DETAILS
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
maximum acceleration and speed
may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
This message displays when trying
to start the vehicle if an RKE
transmitter is not detected. The
transmitter battery may be weak.
See “Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP
ENGINE
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKE
TO RESTART
This message is displayed when
attempting to turn off the vehicle
and the remote is no longer
detected. Restarting is allowed
without the remote for five minutes.
Press the brake pedal to restart the
vehicle.
Fuel System Messages
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-39
NUMBER OF KEYS
PROGRAMMED
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL
ON/OFF
Object Detection System
Messages
This message displays when
programming new keys to the
vehicle.
This message is displayed when the
exterior lamp control is in AUTO and
the lights have turned on or off. See
Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6‑4.
24 GHz RADARS OFF
This message displays when driving
in certain areas where there may be
radar interference. Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC), Forward Collision
Alert (FCA), and the Active
Emergency Braking System may not
work or may not work as well. The
vehicle does not need service.
REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE
This message displays when
leaving the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter still inside.
XXX TURN INDICATOR
FAILURE
When one of the turn signals is out,
this message displays to show
which bulb needs to be replaced.
See Bulb Replacement on
page 10‑23 and Replacement Bulbs
on page 10‑25.
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
AUTOMATIC COLLISION
PREP OFF
This message displays when the
battery in the RKE transmitter needs
to be replaced.
This message displays when the
Active Emergency Braking System
has been turned off. See Active
Emergency Braking System on
page 9‑50.
TURN SIGNAL ON
Lamp Messages
This message is displayed if the
turn signal has been left on. Turn off
the turn signal.
AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARD
LIGHTING) LAMPS NEED
SERVICE
AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP
REDUCED
This message displays when the
AFL system is disabled and needs
service. See your dealer. See
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on
page 6‑5.
This message displays when the
Active Emergency Braking System
has been set to the "Alert" setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-40
Instruments and Controls
.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar object detection or
camera performance.
This setting disables most automatic
braking functions of the Auto
Collision Preparation feature. Some
last-second automatic braking
capability is still provided with the
"Alert" setting, but braking is less
likely to occur. See Active
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when
attempting to activate the Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) system
when it is temporarily unavailable.
The LDW system does not need
service.
This message may not come on for
a long time after the condition
occurs, and it may require an
ignition cycle to clear.
Emergency Braking System on
page 9‑50.
FORWARD COLLISION
ALERT OFF
This message could be due to the
camera being blocked. Cleaning the
outside of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror may correct the
issue.
AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP
UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when the
Forward Collision Alert has been
turned off.
This message displays when the
Active Emergency Braking System
is unavailable. The Active
Emergency Braking System does
not need service.
FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED
CLEAN WINDSHIELD
PARK ASSIST OFF
This message displays when the
Parking Assist system has been
turned off or when there is a
temporary condition causing the
system to be disabled.
This message displays when the
camera is blocked. Cleaning the
outside of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror may correct the
issue. The Lane Departure Warning
system will not operate. Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC), Forward
Collision Alert (FCA), and the Active
Emergency Braking System may not
work or may not work as well.
This can occur under the following
conditions:
.
The radar is not clean. Keep the
radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
entire front and/or rear of the
vehicle. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10‑76.
REAR AUTO BRAKE AND
PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when
attempting to activate the parking
and backing features of the Driver
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
5-41
Assistance System when they are
temporarily unavailable. The system
does not need service.
SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST
SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Parking Assist
system. Do not use this system to
help you park. See your dealer for
service.
If this message displays, take the
vehicle to your dealer to repair the
system.
This can occur under the following
conditions:
.
The radar is not clean. Keep the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
Forward Collision Alert (FCA),
Active Emergency Braking System,
Assistance Systems for Parking or
Backing, and/or Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) system may not
work. Do not use these systems
until the vehicle has been repaired.
radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
entire front and/or rear of the
vehicle. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10‑76.
SERVICE REAR AUTO BRAKE
AND PARK ASSIST
This message displays if there is a
problem with the parking and
backing features of the Driver
Assistance System. Do not use this
system to help park or back the
vehicle. See your dealer for service.
.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar object detection or
camera performance.
SERVICE FRONT CAMERA
If this message remains on after
continued driving, the vehicle needs
service. Do not use the Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) and
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
features. Take the vehicle to your
dealer.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF
See Driver Assistance Systems on
page 9‑43.
This message indicates that the
driver has turned the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system off.
SERVICE AUTOMATIC
COLLISION PREP
SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
SYSTEM
If this message displays, take the
vehicle to your dealer to repair the
system.
If this message remains on after
continued driving, the vehicle needs
service. Side Blind Zone Alert
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-42
Instruments and Controls
(SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) features will not work. Take
the vehicle to your dealer.
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
Ride Control System
Messages
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). See Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑28.
SERVICE REAR AXLE
SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when there
is a problem with the
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System. See
your dealer for service.
This message indicates that Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) are
disabled either because the sensor
is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in the blind zone, or the
vehicle is passing through an open
area, such as the desert, where
there is insufficient data for
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑28.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the StabiliTrak system.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑29.
operation. This message may also
activate during heavy rain or due to
road spray. The vehicle does not
need service. For cleaning, see
"Washing the Vehicle" under
TRACTION CONTROL ON
SERVICE SUSPENSION
SYSTEM
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned on. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑28.
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Magnetic Ride
Control system. See Magnetic Ride
Control on page 9‑31. Have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Exterior Care on page 10‑76.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-43
SERVICE POWER STEERING
SERVICE KEYLESS START
SYSTEM
Airbag System Messages
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the power steering
system and a chime may sound.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
SERVICE AIRBAG
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the pushbutton start
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the airbag system.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
Tire Messages
Security Messages
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑44.
Starting the Vehicle
Messages
Service Vehicle Messages
PRESS BRAKE TO START
VEHICLE
SERVICE AC SYSTEM
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the air conditioning
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message is displayed when
attempting to start the vehicle
without first pressing the brake
pedal.
This message displays when the
system is learning new tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑44.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
This message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the tires
is low.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-44
Instruments and Controls
This message also displays LEFT
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
the location of the low tire.
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE
ENGINE
Transmission Messages
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid
This message displays if there is a
problem with the transmission. See
your dealer.
The low tire pressure warning light
will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑25.
SHIFT DENIED
If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Tires
on page 10‑34, Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41.
This message displays when using
the Driver Shift Control (DSC) and
attempting to shift to a gear not
appropriate for the vehicle speed
and engine revolutions per
temperature reaches a safe level.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
minute (rpm). See Manual Mode on
page 9‑24.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
SHIFT TO PARK
You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. The
DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
This message displays when the
transmission needs to be shifted to
P (Park). This may appear when
attempting to remove the key from
the vehicle if the vehicle is not in
P (Park).
This message displays when ice
conditions are possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-45
Vehicle Speed Messages
Window Messages
Vehicle
Personalization
SELECTED SPEED LIMIT
EXCEEDED
OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/
PASSENGER WINDOW
The audio system controls are used
to access the personalization
menus for customizing vehicle
features.
This message is displayed when the
vehicle speed is greater than the set
speed. See "Speed Warning" under
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28.
This message is displayed when the
window needs to be reprogrammed.
If the vehicle's battery has been
recharged or disconnected, you will
need to reprogram each front
window for the express-up feature to
work. See Power Windows on
page 2‑20.
Personalization Menus
1. Press SETTINGS on the Home
page on the infotainment system
display.
Washer Fluid Messages
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
The following list of menu items may
be available:
This message may display when the
washer fluid level is low. See
Washer Fluid on page 10‑17.
.
Climate and Air Quality
.
Collision/Detection Systems
.
Comfort and Convenience
.
Lighting
.
Power Door Locks
.
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-46
Instruments and Controls
Press Air Quality Sensor. Press to
select Off, Low Sensitivity, or High
Auto Defog
Climate and Air Quality
When set to ON, the front defog will
automatically come on when the
vehicle is started. Only vehicles with
the dual automatic climate control
will have this option.
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu and the following may be
displayed:
Sensitivity. Press 0 to go back to
the last menu.
.
Auto Compartment Zone Temp
Auto Fan Max Speed
.
This feature allows for selection of
the compartment zone temperature
setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
Air Quality Sensor
Press Auto Defog. Press to select
.
Auto Compartment Zone Temp
Off or On. Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
.
Auto Cooled Seats
.
Auto Defog
Press Auto Compartment Zone
Auto Rear Defog
Temp. Press to select Single Zone,
.
Auto Rear Defog
If equipped, this allows the Auto
Rear Defog to be turned on or off.
This feature will automatically turn
on the rear window defogger when it
is cold outside.
Dual Zone, or Last Setting. Press 0
to go back to the last menu.
Auto Fan Max Speed
This feature will set the maximum
auto fan speed.
Auto Cooled Seats
When on, this feature will turn the
vented seats on when using remote
start on warm days.
Press Auto Fan Max Speed. Press
to select Low, Medium, or High.
Press Auto Rear Defog. Press to
select Off or On. Press 0 to go back
to the last menu.
Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
Press Auto Cooled Seats. Press to
Collision/Detection Systems
select Off or On. Press 0 to go back
to the last menu.
Air Quality Sensor
Select the Collision/Detection
Systems menu and the following
may be displayed if equipped:
This allows for selection of air
quality sensor operation at high or
low sensitivity. Only vehicles with
the dual automatic climate control
will have this option.
.
Alert Type
.
Auto Collision Preparation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-47
.
.
Go Notifier
Preparation feature. Some
Side Blind Zone Alert
last-second automatic braking
capability is still provided with the
"Alert" setting, but it is much less
likely to be triggered by most driving
conditions. Off disables all Forward
Collision Alert and Automatic
Braking capabilities of the Auto
Collision Preparation feature. See
Active Emergency Braking System
on page 9‑50.
Side Blind Zone Alert
This allows the Side Blind Zone
Alert feature to be turned on or off.
Alert Type
Press Side Blind Zone Alert. Press
This feature will set crash alerts to
beeps or seat vibrations. This
setting affects all crash alerts
including Forward Collision, Lane
Departure Warning, Adaptive Cruise
Control, Parking Assist, and
Backing Warning alerts.
to select Off or On. Press 0 to go
back to the last menu.
Comfort and Convenience
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following will be displayed:
Press Auto Collision Preparation.
Press to select Off, Alert & Brake,
Press Alert Type. Press to select
.
Auto Memory Recall
Beeps or Safety Alert Seat. Press 0
to go back to the last menu.
or Alert. Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
.
Easy Exit Options
.
Auto Collision Preparation
Chime Volume
Go Notifier
.
This feature will turn on or off the
Forward Collision Alert feature as
well as the Automatic Braking
capability of the Auto Collision
Preparation feature. With the "Alert
and Brake" setting, both Forward
Collision Alert as well as the
Reverse Tilt Mirror
This feature will give a reminder that
Adaptive Cruise Control provides
when it has brought the vehicle to a
complete stop behind another
stopping vehicle, and then that
vehicle drives on.
.
Personalization by Driver
Auto Memory Recall
This allows the Auto Memory Recall
feature to be turned on or off.
Press Auto Memory Recall. Press to
select Off, On, On - Driver Door
Open, or On - At Ignition On. See
Memory Seats on page 3‑7 or press
0 to go back to the last menu.
Automatic Braking capability of the
Auto Collision Preparation feature
are available. The "Alert" setting
disables most automatic braking
functions of the Auto Collision
Press Go Notifier. Press to select
Off or On. Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-48
Instruments and Controls
Easy Exit Options
Press Reverse Tilt Mirror. Press to
select Off, On, On - Driver and
Passenger, On - Driver or
Lighting
This allows the Easy Exit Options
feature to be turned on or off.
Select the Lighting menu and the
following will be displayed:
On - Passenger. Press 0 to go back
to the last menu.
.
Press Easy Exit Options. Press to
Vehicle Locator Lights
select Off or On. Press 0 to go back
to the last menu.
.
Exit Lighting
Personalization by Driver
.
Auto High Beam
If equipped, this allows the
Personalization by Driver feature to
be turned on or off.
Chime Volume
.
Daytime Tail Lights
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level.
Vehicle Locator Lights
Press Personalization by Driver.
This feature will flash the exterior
Press Chime Volume. Press + or −
to adjust the volume. Press 0 to go
back to the last menu.
Press to select Off or On. Press 0
to go back to the last menu.
lights when K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed to locate the vehicle.
Language
Reverse Tilt Mirror
Press Vehicle Locator Lights. Press
Select the Language menu and the
following will be displayed:
When on, both the driver and
to select Off or On. Press 0 to go
back to the last menu.
passenger outside mirrors will tilt
downward when the vehicle is
shifted to R (Reverse) to improve
visibility of the ground near the rear
wheels. They will return to their
previous driving position when the
vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)
or the ignition is turned to OFF.
.
English
.
Exit Lighting
French
.
This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
Spanish
Press to select the language. Press
0 to go back to the last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-49
.
Delayed Door Lock
Press Exit Lighting. Press to select
Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,
Press Delayed Door Lock. Press to
select Off or On. Press 0 to go back
to the last menu.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
or 120 Seconds. Press 0 to go back
to the last menu.
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If Off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available.
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Auto High Beam
Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
and the following may be displayed:
This allows the Auto High Beam to
be turned on or off.
.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Press Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out.
Press Auto High Beam. Press to
select Off or On. On some vehicles
select Off, Normal Sensitivity,
.
Remote Lock Feedback
Press to select Off or On. Press 0
to go back to the last menu.
.
Remote Door Unlock
.
or Low Sensitivity. Press 0 to go
Auto Door Unlock
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
back to the last menu.
.
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
Daytime Tail Lights
.
Passive Door Unlock
This feature allows the taillamps to
be on during the day.
.
Passive Door Lock
Press Auto Door Unlock. Press to
select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
.
Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder
Press Daytime Tail Lights. Press to
Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
select Off or On. Press 0 to go back
to the last menu.
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
Delayed Door Lock
Power Door Locks
When on, this feature will delay the
locking of the doors. To override the
delay, press the power door lock
switch on the door.
Select Power Door Locks and the
following will be displayed:
Press Remote Unlock Light
Feedback. Press to select Off or
.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Flash Lights. Press 0 to go back to
the last menu.
.
Auto Door Unlock
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-50
Instruments and Controls
Remote Lock Feedback
On - Driver and Passenger, or
Passive Door Lock
On - Driver. Press 0 to go back to
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when locking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or off
or used to select feedback when
using the button on the driver door
to lock the vehicle. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
the last menu.
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
Press Remote Lock Feedback.
Press to select Off, Lights and Horn,
If equipped and turned on, this
feature will turn the heated seats on
when using remote start on
cold days.
Lights Only, or Horn Only. Press 0
to go back to the last menu.
Press Passive Door Lock. Press to
select On, On with Horn Chirp,
Remote Door Unlock
Press Remote Start Auto Heat
Seats. Press to select Off or On.
On some vehicles select Off,
On - Driver and Passenger, or
or Off. Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing K on the
RKE transmitter.
Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder
On - Driver. Press 0 to go back to
the last menu.
This feature sounds an alert when
the RKE is left in the vehicle.
Press Remote Door Unlock. Press
to select All Doors or Driver Door
Passive Door Unlock
Press Remote Left in Vehicle
Reminder. Press to select Off or On.
Only. Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
This allows the selection of what
doors will unlock when using the
button on the driver door to unlock
the vehicle.
Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
If equipped and turned on, this
feature will turn the vented seats on
when using remote start on
warm days.
Press Passive Door Unlock. Press
to select All Doors or Driver Door
Only. Press 0 to go back to the
last menu.
Press Remote Start Auto Cool
Seats. Press to select Off or On.
On some vehicles select Off,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-51
If the vehicle has this feature, you
Keep the original hand-held
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
will see these buttons with one
indicator light next to them in the
overhead console.
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal
Remote system programming. It is
also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Remote system buttons
be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Remote
System Buttons” later in this
section.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Universal Remote System
Programming
Do not use the Universal Remote
system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any
garage door opener model
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or
gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate being
manufactured before April 1,1982.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Remote system. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist with programming
the Universal Remote system.
programmed.
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in the hand-held
transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-52
Instruments and Controls
2. At the same time, press and
hold both the hand-held
button selected in Step 2) while
observing the indicator light and
garage door activation.
Programming the Universal
Remote System
transmitter button and one of the
three Universal Remote system
buttons to be used to operate
the garage door. Do not release
the Universal Remote system
button or the hand-held
transmitter button until the
indicator light changes from a
slowly to a rapidly flashing light.
You now may release both
buttons.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Remote system, call
1-800-355-3515 or go to
.
If the indicator light stays on
continuously or the garage
door starts to move when
the Universal Remote
system button is pressed
and released, then the
programming is complete.
There is no need to
www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
continue programming
Steps 4–6.
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.
To program up to three devices:
.
If the Universal Remote
system indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds,
then turns to a constant
light and the garage door
does not move, continue
with programming
1. Hold the end of the hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to
3 in) away from the Universal
Remote system buttons while
keeping the indicator light in
view. The hand-held transmitter
was supplied by the
3. Press and hold for five seconds
the newly trained Universal
Remote system button (the
Steps 4–6.
manufacturer of the garage door
opener receiver
(motor-head unit).
It may be helpful to have
another person assist with
the remaining Steps 4–6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-53
door, and then release it. If the
Canadian radio-frequency laws
garage door does not move or
the lamp on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit) does not flash, press and
hold the same button a second
time for two seconds, then
release it. Again, if the door
does not move or the garage
door lamp does not flash, press
and hold the same button a third
time for two seconds, then
release.
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long
enough for the Universal Remote
system to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
“Learn” or “Smart” Button
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate
operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming the
4. After Steps 1–3 have been
completed, locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button inside the garage
on the garage door opener
The Universal Remote system
should now activate the
garage door.
Universal Remote System”
receiver (motor-head unit). The
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 2 under
“Programming the Universal Remote
System” with the following:
To program the remaining two
Universal Remote system buttons,
begin with Step 1 of “Programming
the Universal Remote System.”
5. Firmly press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After
pressing this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 6.
Continue to press and hold the
Universal Remote system button
while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
transmitter button until the
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
6. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
for two seconds the Universal
Remote system button, selected
in Step 2 to control the garage
frequency signal has been
If you have questions or need help
programming the Universal Remote
system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
successfully accepted by the
Universal Remote system. The
Universal Remote system indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-54
Instruments and Controls
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
“Programming the Universal Remote
System” to complete.
Erasing Universal Remote
System Buttons
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Remote System
Button
All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Remote system buttons:
Universal Remote System
Operation
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Remote system
device:
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Remote system
button. Do not release the
button.
Using the Universal Remote
System
1. Press and hold down the two
outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash.
This should take about
10 seconds.
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Remote system button for
at least half of a second. The
indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 under “Programming
the Universal Remote System.”
2. Release both buttons.
If you have questions or need help
programming the Universal Remote
system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
to www.homelink.com. You may
also call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer
Assistance Offices on page 13‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-1
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Automatic Headlamp
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Headlamp Leveling Control . . . 6-5
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5
Turn and Lane-Change
The exterior lamp control is on the
turn signal lever.
Turn the control to the following
positions:
O (Off): Turns off the exterior
lamps. The knob returns to the
AUTO position after it is released.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Turn to O again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
In Canada, the headlamps will
automatically reactivate when the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
turns the exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
The system turns the high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark
enough and there is no other traffic
present.
Driving with Automatic High
Beams
The system only activates the high
beams when driving over 40 km/h
(25 mph).
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps together with the
following:
There is a sensor near the top
center of the windshield that
automatically controls the system.
Keep this area of the windshield
clear of debris to allow for best
system performance.
.
Sidemarker Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
This light comes on in the
instrument cluster when the
automatic high-beam system is
enabled.
The high-beam headlamps remain
on, under the automatic control,
until one of the following situations
occur:
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the
following:
.
Turning On and Enabling
Automatic High Beams
Sidemarker Lamps
.
The system detects an
.
Taillamps
approaching vehicle's
headlamps.
To enable the automatic high-beam
system, with the turn signal lever in
the neutral position, turn the exterior
lamp control to AUTO. The blue
high-beam on light appears on the
instrument cluster when the high
beams are on.
.
License Plate Lamps
.
.
The system detects a preceding
Instrument Panel Lights
vehicle's taillamps.
.
Parking Lamps
.
The outside light is bright
Automatic High-Beam System
enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
This system turns the vehicle's
high-beam headlamps on and off
according to surrounding traffic
conditions.
.
The vehicle's speed drops below
20 km/h (12 mph).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-3
.
.
The automatic high-beam
The other vehicle's lamps cannot
be detected due to dense
exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road
spray, mist, or other airborne
obstructions.
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
A warning chime sounds if the driver
door is opened while the ignition is
off and the exterior lamps are on.
system can be disabled by the
high/low-beam changer or the
flash-to-pass feature. If this
happens, the high/low-beam
changer must be activated two
times within five seconds to
reactivate the automatic
.
.
The vehicle's windshield is dirty,
cracked, or obstructed by
something that blocks the view
of the light sensor.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
high-beam system. The
instrument cluster light will come
on to indicate the automatic
high-beam system is reactivated.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑3 and
Flash-to-Pass on page 6‑4.
The vehicle is loaded such that
the front end points upward,
causing the light sensor to aim
high and not detect headlamps
and taillamps.
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer): Push the turn signal
lever away from you and release, to
turn the high beams on. To return to
low beams, push the lever again or
pull it toward you and release.
.
Driving on winding or hilly roads.
The high beams may not turn off
automatically if the system cannot
detect another vehicle's lamps
because of any of the following:
The automatic high-beam
headlamps may need to be disabled
if any of the above conditions exist.
.
The other vehicle's lamps are
This feature can be turned on or off
or the sensitivity can be changed in
vehicle personalization. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑45.
missing, damaged, obstructed
from view, or otherwise
undetected.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument cluster when the
high-beam headlamps are on.
.
The other vehicle's lamps are
covered with dirt, snow, and/or
road spray.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Lighting
When the DRL are on, the taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, and other lamps
will not be on.
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
Flash-to-Pass
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever toward you, and
release.
The DRL turn off when the
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
headlamps are turned to O or the
ignition is off.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
Automatic Headlamp
System
When the exterior lamp control is
set to AUTO and it is dark enough
outside, the headlamps come on
automatically.
The automatic headlamp system
turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition
is off.
For vehicles sold in Canada, this
control only works when the
transmission is in P (Park).
For vehicles with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, the
dedicated DRL will come on when
all of the following conditions
are met:
Lights On with Wipers
If the windshield wipers are
activated in daylight with the engine
on, and the exterior lamp control is
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
lamps, and other exterior lamps
come on. The transition time for the
lamps coming on varies based on
wiper speed. When the wipers are
not operating, these lamps turn off.
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamp control is
in AUTO.
.
The light sensor determines it is
There is a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel. Do not cover the
sensor.
daytime.
.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-5
Curve Lighting
Move the exterior lamp control to P
or ; to disable this feature.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The light beam pivots based on the
steering wheel position and vehicle
speed of at least 10 km/h (6 mph).
The headlamps shine at an angle of
up to 15 degrees to the right or left
of the direction of travel.
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
For vehicles with uplevel
headlamps, the AFL system adjusts
the headlamps to provide greater
road illumination in various driving
conditions.
Headlamp Leveling
Control
Automatic Headlamp Leveling
To enable AFL, set the exterior lamp
control to the AUTO position.
Moving the control out of the AUTO
position will deactivate the system.
AFL will operate when the vehicle
speed is greater than 3 km/h
For vehicles with headlamp leveling,
the range of the headlamps is
adjusted automatically based on
vehicle load.
| (Hazard Warning Flashers):
Press this button on the center
stack to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press
again to turn the flashers off.
(2 mph). AFL will not operate when
the transmission is in R (Reverse).
AFL is not immediately operable
after starting the vehicle; driving a
short distance is required to
The hazard warning flashers turn on
automatically if the airbags deploy.
calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Lighting
The turn and lane-change signal
can be turned off manually by
moving the lever back to its original
position.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
If after signaling a turn or lane
change, the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a
bulb is not burned out, check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10‑26.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
An arrow on the instrument cluster
flashes in the direction of the turn or
lane change.
The brightness of the instrument
panel lighting and steering wheel
controls can be adjusted.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
D (Instrument Panel
Illumination): Move the
thumbwheel up or down to brighten
or dim the lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
Reading Lamps
6-7
The brightness of the displays
automatically adjusts based on
outdoor lighting. The instrument
panel illumination control will set the
lowest level to which the displays
will automatically be adjusted.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamp is in the overhead
console.
There are reading lamps on the
overhead console and over the rear
passenger doors. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened. To manually turn
the reading lamps on or off:
Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps come on when
any door is opened and the dome
lamp is in the DOOR position.
To change the dome lamp settings,
press:
OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
when a door is open.
Press m or n next to each
overhead console reading lamp.
DOOR: The lamp comes on when
a door is opened.
ON: Turns the lamp on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Lighting
This feature can be changed. See
“Vehicle Locator Lights” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, back-up lamps, outside
mirror lamps, exterior door handle
lamps, dome lamp, and most of the
Exit Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, parking
lamps, back-up lamps, outside
mirror lamps, license plate lamps,
and exterior door handle lamps
come on at night, or in areas with
limited lighting, when a door is
opened after the ignition is turned
off. The dome lamp comes on after
the ignition is changed to the OFF
position. The exterior lamps and
dome lamp remain on after the door
is closed for a set amount of time,
then automatically turn off.
interior lights turn on briefly when K
is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
When the driver door is opened, all
control lights, Driver Information
Center (DIC) lights, and door pocket
lights turn on. After about
Press the button near the rear
passenger reading lamps.
30 seconds the exterior lamps turn
off, then the dome lamp and
remaining interior lights dim to off.
Entry lighting can be disabled
manually by changing the ignition
out of the OFF position, or by
The exterior lamps turn off
immediately by turning the exterior
lamp control off.
This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
pressing Q on the RKE transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-9
Battery Power Protection
The battery saver feature is
designed to protect the vehicle's
battery.
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver
The exterior lamps turn off about
10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off, if the parking lamps or
headlamps have been manually left
on. This protects against draining
the battery. To restart the 10-minute
timer, turn the exterior lamp control
to the off position and then back to
the parking lamp or headlamp
position.
If some interior lamps are left on
and the ignition is turned off, the
battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after
some time.
To keep the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, the ignition must be in
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
Lighting
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-1
Introduction
Infotainment
System
Infotainment
See the separate infotainment
manual for information on the radio,
audio players, phone, navigation
system, and voice or speech
recognition. It also includes
information on settings and
downloadable applications
(if equipped).
Introduction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Control Systems
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Uplevel)
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Rear Climate Control
The climate control buttons and the touch screen are used to adjust the
heating, cooling, and ventilation.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Climate Control Buttons
1. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
4. Driver and Passenger Heated
and Ventilated Seats
(If Equipped)
2. Fan Control
3. OFF (Fan)
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
6. Defrost
7. Rear Window Defogger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Climate Controls
8. Recirculation
8. Air Delivery Mode Control
The climate control status screen
appears briefly when the climate
control buttons on the faceplate are
adjusted. The air delivery mode can
be adjusted on the climate control
status screen.
Climate Control Touch Screen
The fan, air delivery mode, air
conditioning, and SYNC settings
can be controlled by pressing
CLIMATE on the infotainment home
screen or the climate button in the
touch screen application tray.
A selection can then be made on
the front climate control page
displayed. See the infotainment
manual.
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the indicator light is on or
AUTO is displayed on the touch
screen, the system is in full
Climate Control Status Screen
Climate Touch Screen Controls
1. Outside Temperature Display
automatic operation. If the air
delivery mode or fan setting is
manually adjusted, the auto
indicator turns off and the display
will show the selected settings. Auto
operation can be turned off
2. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Displays
3. Fan Control
4. SYNC TEMP (Synchronized
Temperature)
individually for climate settings.
5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)
For automatic operation:
1. Press AUTO.
6. Climate Control Selection
(Application Tray Button)
7. Rear (Rear Climate Control
Touch Screen)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-3
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
SYNC TEMP (Synchronized
Temperature): Press SYNC TEMP
on the touch screen to link all
climate zone settings to the driver
settings. Adjust the driver side
temperature control to change the
linked temperature. When the
passenger settings are adjusted, the
SYNC TEMP button is displayed
when the temperatures are
cancels automatic fan control and
the fan can be controlled manually.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation. To turn off the fan and
climate control system, press and
hold the fan down button or touch
screen fan control until it is off.
needed for best comfort.
To improve fuel efficiency and to
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
may be automatically selected in
warm weather. The recirculation
Air Delivery Mode Control: When
the climate information is displayed,
press the desired air delivery mode
on the touch screen to change the
direction of the airflow. The selected
air delivery mode button is lit.
Pressing any of the air delivery
buttons cancels automatic air
delivery control and the direction of
the airflow can be controlled
light will not come on. Press @ to
select recirculation; press it again to
select outside air.
unlinked.
Rear (If Equipped): Press this
button on the front climate control
touch screen to open the rear
climate control screen. The rear
climate control settings can now be
adjusted from the front
English units can be changed to
metric units through the instrument
cluster. See “Settings” under
Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.
OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan on
or off. The temperature control and
air delivery mode can still be
adjusted.
passenger area.
manually. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation.
Manual Operation
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
z 9 y (Fan Control): Press the
fan control buttons or the touch
screen fan control, to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Press and
hold the buttons or the touch screen
control to adjust speed more
w / x (Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls): The
temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the temperature. Press
and hold to rapidly increase or
decrease the temperature.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
quickly. The fan speed setting
displays. Pressing either button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Climate Controls
recirculated as needed to help
quickly cool the inside of the
vehicle.
Manual recirculation mode is not
available when in Defrost or Defog
modes.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
The climate control system may
have a sensor to detect air pollution.
When using automatic air
recirculation, the air quality control
system may operate. To adjust the
sensitivity of the air quality sensor,
see “Climate and Air Quality” under
Vehicle Personalization on
Auto Defog: The climate control
system may have a sensor to
automatically detect high humidity
inside the vehicle. When high
humidity is detected, the climate
control system may adjust to
outside air supply and turn on the
air conditioner. If the climate control
system does not detect possible
window fogging, it returns to normal
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
on, see “Climate and Air Quality”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield. Press the 0 button to
turn on or off. Changing the air
delivery mode also turns the
defrost off.
page 5‑45.
@ (Recirculation): Press to
# (Air Conditioning): Press the
AC Mode touch screen control to
turn the automatic air conditioning
on or off. If the fan is turned off or
the outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioner will
not run.
alternate between recirculating air
inside the vehicle or pulling in
outside air. The indicator light on the
button is lit when recirculation mode
is active. This helps to quickly cool
the air inside the vehicle or prevent
outside air and odors from entering.
Rear Window Defogger
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation and the air conditioner
runs as needed.
Pressing this button cancels
automatic recirculation. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation;
recirculation runs automatically as
needed.
The rear window defogger turns off
automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again, it
runs for about five minutes before
Automatic Air Recirculation:
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the air is automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-5
turning off. At higher vehicle
speeds, the rear window defogger
may stay on continuously.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect the
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
on cold ambient conditions. The
rear defog indicator light does not
come on during a remote start. If the
vehicle has heated or ventilated
seats, they may come on during a
remote start. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2‑8 and Heated and
Ventilated Seats on page 1‑8.
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation. See
“Climate and Air Quality” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45. When Auto Rear Defog
is selected, the rear window
defogger turns on automatically
when the interior temperature is cold
and the outside temperature is
about 4°C (40°F) and below. The
auto rear defogger turns off
Sensor
The solar sensor, on top of the
instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
Driver and Passenger Heated and
Ventilated Seats (If Equipped):
Press J or z to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
The climate control system uses the
sensor information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
automatically after about
10 minutes. At higher vehicle
speeds, the rear window defogger
may stay on continuously.
Press C or { to ventilate the driver
or passenger seat. See Heated and
Ventilated Seats on page 1‑8.
The upper region of gridlines on the
rear window are antenna lines and
are not intended to heat when the
defogger is activated.
If the sensor is covered, the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with the
remote start feature, the climate
control system may run when the
vehicle is started remotely. The
system uses the driver’s previous
settings to heat or cool the inside of
the vehicle. The rear defog may
come on during remote start based
The heated outside rearview mirrors
turn on when the rear window
defogger button is on and help to
clear fog or frost from the surface of
the mirrors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Climate Controls
Automatic Operation
Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Base)
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
For vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
When the indicator light is on or
AUTO is displayed on the touch
screen, the system is in full
automatic operation. If the air
delivery mode or fan setting is
manually adjusted, the auto
indicator turns off and the display
will show the selected settings.
For automatic operation:
1. Press AUTO.
1. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
7. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats (If Equipped)
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
2. Fan Control
8. AC (Air Conditioning)
9. Defrost
3. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
4. Air Delivery Mode Control
5. OFF (Fan)
needed for best comfort.
10. Rear Window Defogger
11. Recirculation
To improve fuel efficiency and to
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
may be automatically selected in
warm weather. The recirculation
6. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-7
passenger settings are adjusted, the
SYNC button is displayed when the
temperatures are unlinked.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
light will not come on. Press @ to
select recirculation; press it again to
select outside air.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
Manual Operation
English units can be changed to
metric units through the instrument
cluster. See “Settings” under
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
z 9 or 9 y (Fan Control):
Press the fan control buttons to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Press and hold the buttons to adjust
speed more quickly. The fan speed
setting displays. Pressing either
button cancels automatic fan control
and the fan can be controlled
manually. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation. To turn off the
fan and climate control system,
press and hold the fan down button.
Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.
OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan on
or off. The temperature control and
air delivery mode can still be
adjusted.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
w / x (Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls): The
temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the temperature. Press
and hold to rapidly increase or
decrease the temperature.
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield. Press the 0 button to
turn on or off.
z N y (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press the air delivery
mode buttons to change the
direction of the airflow. Selecting
any of the air delivery modes
cancels automatic air delivery
control and the direction of the
airflow can be controlled manually.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the automatic air conditioning
on or off. If the fan is turned off or
the outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioner will
not run.
SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature): Press SYNC to link
all climate zone settings to the
driver settings. Adjust the driver side
temperature control to change the
linked temperature. When the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Climate Controls
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation and the air conditioner
runs as needed. When the indicator
light is on, the air conditioner runs
automatically to cool the air inside
the vehicle or to dry the air needed
to defog the windshield faster.
Manual recirculation mode is not
available when in Defrost or Defog
modes.
turning off. At higher vehicle
speeds, the rear window defogger
may stay on continuously.
Auto Defog: The climate control
system may have a sensor to
automatically detect high humidity
inside the vehicle. When high
humidity is detected, the climate
control system may adjust to
outside air supply and turn on the
air conditioner. If the climate control
system does not detect possible
window fogging, it returns to normal
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
on, see “Climate and Air Quality”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation. See
“Climate and Air Quality” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45. When Auto Rear Defog
is selected, the rear window
defogger turns on automatically
when the interior temperature is cold
and the outside temperature is
about 4°C (40°F) and below. The
auto rear defogger turns off
Automatic Air Recirculation:
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the air is automatically
recirculated as needed to help
quickly cool the inside of the
vehicle.
@ (Recirculation): Press to
automatically after about
alternate between recirculating air
inside the vehicle or pulling in
10 minutes. At higher vehicle
speeds, the rear window defogger
may stay on continuously.
outside air. The indicator light on the
button is lit when recirculation mode
is active. This helps to quickly cool
the air inside the vehicle or prevent
outside air and odors from entering.
Rear Window Defogger
The upper region of gridlines on the
rear window are antenna lines and
are not intended to heat when the
defogger is activated.
= REAR (Rear Window
Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off.
Pressing this button cancels
automatic recirculation. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation;
recirculation runs automatically as
needed.
The rear window defogger turns off
automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again it
runs for about five minutes before
The heated outside mirrors turn on
when the rear window defogger
button is on. They help to clear fog
or frost from the surface of the
mirrors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-9
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect the
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Sensors
The solar sensor, on top of the
instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
The climate control system uses the
sensor information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
If the sensor is covered, the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats (If Equipped): Press M or L
to heat the driver or passenger seat.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑9.
Rear Climate Control Buttons
1. Heated Rear Seats (If Equipped)
2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
Rear Climate Control
System
For vehicles with a rear climate
control system, the settings can be
adjusted with the rear climate
control buttons and the touch
screen.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with the
remote vehicle start feature, the
climate control system may run
when the vehicle is started remotely.
The system uses the driver's
previous settings to heat or cool the
inside of the vehicle. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2‑8.
3. MODE (Air Delivery Mode
Control)
4. O (On/Off)
5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
Climate Controls
8. Air Delivery Mode Control
Rear Control Lockout: Press to
lock or unlock control of the rear
climate control system from the rear
seat passengers. When locked, the
rear climate control can only be
adjusted from the front seat.
Rear: Press this button on the front
climate control touch screen to open
the rear climate control screen. The
rear climate control settings can
now be adjusted from the front
passenger area.
Automatic Operation
O (On/Off): Press the O button or
REARO on the touch screen to turn
the rear climate control on or off.
If the rear climate control is turned
Rear AUTO: Press to turn on or off.
The air delivery and fan speed are
controlled automatically. The AUTO
indicator appears on the display.
If any of the climate control settings
are manually adjusted, this cancels
full automatic operation.
Rear Climate Touch Screen
Controls
off using REARO on the touch
screen, the O button on the rear
climate control faceplate must be
pressed twice to turn the system
back on.
1. Outside Temperature Display
Manual Operation
2. Rear Climate Temperature
Control
S A T (Fan Control): Press or
press and hold the front climate
control buttons or touch screen to
increase or decrease the airflow.
SYNC: Press SYNC on the touch
screen to match the rear climate
control temperature to the front
climate control driver temperature.
The SYNC button will be lit. Press
the TEMP, MODE or AUTO button
twice to unlink the set driver and
rear temperatures. The SYNC
button turns off.
3. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperatures)
4. REAR O (On/Off)
5. Rear AUTO (Automatic
Operation)
+/− (Temperature Control): Press
or press and hold the rear
temperature control buttons or touch
screen to adjust the rear passenger
temperature. Press + for warmer air
and press − for cooler air.
6. Front (Front Climate Control
Touch Screen)
7. Rear Control Lockout
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-11
Y / \ /Y (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press the desired mode
button on the touch screen or the
MODE button on the rear faceplate
to change the direction of the airflow
in the rear seating area.
Air Vents
Adjustable air vents are in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel.
M or L (Heated Rear Seats, If
Equipped): Press M or L to heat
the left or right outboard seat
cushion and seatback. See Heated
Rear Seats on page 3‑12.
Move the slider knobs (2) to change
the direction of the airflow.
Additional air vents are beneath the
windshield and the driver and
passenger side door windows.
These are fixed and cannot be
adjusted.
1. Thumbwheel
2. Slider Knob
Use the thumbwheels (1) near the
air vents to open or close off the
airflow.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-12
Climate Controls
Operation Tips
The refrigerant system should only
be serviced by trained and certified
technicians. The air conditioning
evaporator should never be repaired
or replaced by one from a salvage
vehicle. It should only be replaced
by a new evaporator to ensure
proper and safe operation.
Maintenance
.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3.
.
Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
During service, all refrigerants
should be reclaimed with proper
equipment. Venting refrigerants
directly to the atmosphere is harmful
to the environment and may also
create unsafe conditions based on
inhalation, combustion, frostbite,
or other health-based concerns.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
See your dealer regarding
replacement of the filter.
Service
.
This vehicle may have the new
environmentally friendly refrigerant,
R1234yf. This refrigerant has a
significantly reduced global warming
impact on the environment,
Do not attach any devices to the
air vent slats. This restricts
airflow and may cause damage
to the air vents.
compared to the traditional
automotive refrigerant, R-134a. All
vehicles have a label underhood
that identifies the refrigerant used in
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-1
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Parking over Things
Ride Control Systems
Driving and
Operating
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-31
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-31
Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-31
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Engine Exhaust
Driving Information
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . 9-34
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Driver Assistance Systems
Driver Assistance
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Assistance Systems for
Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Assistance Systems for
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Active Emergency Braking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . 9-26
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-28
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Driving and Operating
.
.
Designate a front seat
passenger to handle potential
distractions.
Fuel
Driving Information
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-56
California Fuel
Distracted Driving
Become familiar with vehicle
features before driving, such as
programming favorite radio
stations and adjusting climate
control and seat settings.
Program all trip information into
any navigation device prior to
driving.
Distraction comes in many forms
and can take your focus from the
task of driving. Exercise good
judgment and do not let other
activities divert your attention away
from the road. Many local
governments have enacted laws
regarding driver distraction. Become
familiar with the local laws in
your area.
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-56
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
.
Wait until the vehicle is parked
to retrieve items that have fallen
to the floor.
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
To avoid distracted driving, always
keep your eyes on the road, hands
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
.
.
.
Stop or park the vehicle to tend
to children.
Keep pets in an appropriate
carrier or restraint.
.
Do not use a phone in
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to
place or receive necessary
phone calls.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Avoid stressful conversations
while driving, whether with a
passenger or on a cell phone.
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
.
Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
control a vehicle while driving.
9-3
.
.
Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
front of you.
WARNING
{
Taking your eyes off the road too
long or too often could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving.
Focus on the task of driving.
Drunk Driving
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Braking
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
Refer to the CUE manual for more
information on using the CUE
system, if equipped.
WARNING
{
reaction time.
Defensive Driving
Average driver reaction time is
about three-quarters of a second. In
that time, a vehicle moving at
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 ft), which could be a lot of
distance in an emergency.
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking.
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑14.
.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
include:
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and
other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do
and be ready.
.
Keep enough distance between
Do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
you and the vehicle in front
of you.
.
Avoid needless heavy braking.
.
Keep pace with traffic.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Driving and Operating
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
If the vehicle seems harder to steer
than normal when parking or driving
slowly, there may be a problem with
the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer
than normal at slow speeds. See
your dealer for service.
Curve Tips
.
Take curves at a reasonable
speed.
brakes. Doing so could make the
pedal harder to push down. If the
engine stops, there will be some
power brake assist but it will be
used when the brake is applied.
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
.
.
.
Reduce speed before entering a
curve.
Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed through the curve.
Hydraulic Power Steering
Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.
If your vehicle has hydraulic power
steering, it may require
maintenance. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 10‑16.
Steering
Steering in Emergencies
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops, or there
is a system malfunction, the vehicle
can be steered but may require
increased effort. See your dealer if
there is a problem.
.
Variable Effort Steering
There are some situations when
steering around a problem may
be more effective than braking.
Some vehicles have a steering
system that varies the amount of
effort required to steer the vehicle in
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
.
Holding both sides of the
steering wheel allows you to turn
180 degrees without removing
a hand.
The amount of steering effort
required is less at slower speeds to
make the vehicle more
.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
maneuverable and easier to park. At
faster speeds, the steering effort
increases to provide a sport-like feel
to the steering. This provides
maximum control and stability.
allows steering while braking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-5
3. Turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Off-Road Recovery
.
Ease your foot off the
Loss of Control
accelerator pedal and steer the
way you want the vehicle to go.
The vehicle may straighten out.
Be ready for a second skid if it
occurs.
Skidding
There are three types of skids that
correspond to the vehicle's three
control systems:
.
Slow down and adjust your
.
Braking Skid — wheels are not
driving according to weather
conditions. Stopping distance
can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
rolling.
.
Steering or Cornering
Skid — too much speed or
steering in a curve causes tires
to slip and lose cornering force.
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
these tips:
material on the road. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such
as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
.
Acceleration Skid — too much
throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
1. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer the vehicle so that it
straddles the edge of the
pavement.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids
by taking reasonable care suited to
existing conditions, and by not
overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
.
Try to avoid sudden steering,
acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed
by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Driving and Operating
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
WARNING (Continued)
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Driving on Wet Roads
.
Allow extra following distance.
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
.
Pass with caution.
.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
.
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑34.
WARNING
{
Hydroplaning
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
Turn off cruise control.
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Other driving tips include:
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
(Continued)
.
Keep the interior
temperature cool.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-7
.
.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
WARNING (Continued)
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
.
.
Be alert on top of hills;
something could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
WARNING
{
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
.
.
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill.
Steering may also be affected
when ignition is off. You could
crash. Always have the engine
running and the vehicle in gear
when going downhill.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
WARNING
{
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Driving and Operating
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑25.
WARNING (Continued)
Turn off cruise control, on slippery
surfaces.
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Blizzard Conditions
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use Roadside Service.
See Roadside Service on
.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
surface under the tires even more.
page 13‑5. To get help and keep
everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
improves vehicle stability during
hard stops on slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when
on dry pavement.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Open a window about 5 cm
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
mirror.
WARNING
.
{
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-9
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
WARNING (Continued)
to the highest setting. See
“Climate Control Systems” in
the Index.
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑21.
between R (Reverse) and a low
forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑28.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
WARNING
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
page 10‑73.
above 56 km/h (35 mph).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Driving and Operating
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (1), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (2) in
kilograms and pounds.
Vehicle Load Limits
WARNING (Continued)
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
If the vehicle is a Professional
Vehicle, the vehicle-specific
Certification label is provided by
the final stage manufacturer.
The coach-builder should be
consulted if the final stage
manufacturer's label is not
present. The Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating GVWR label
should be on the driver's
door edge.
properly carry: the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
WARNING
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
tire size of the original
equipment tires (3) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle center
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-11
pressures (4). For more
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for those tires, and
the vehicle's capacity weight.
there will be five 150 lb
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 10‑34 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑41.
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
1. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
If this is a professional vehicle, a
vehicle-specific Tire and
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Loading Information label will be
provided and installed by the
final body manufacturer. The
Tire and Loading Information
label should be attached to the
B-pillar. See the final stage
manufacturer's manual or
contact them directly. The label
shows the original tires installed
on the professional vehicle, the
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
See Trailer Towing on page 9‑62
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules, and trailering tips.
amount equals 1400 lbs and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Driving and Operating
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(750 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
3. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
3. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-13
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
WARNING
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
Certification Label
(GVWR), or either the
If the vehicle is a professional
vehicle, the vehicle-specific
certification label is provided by
the final stage manufacturer.
The coach-builder should be
consulted if the final stage
manufacturer's label is not
present. The Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) label
should be on the driver
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
door edge.
If you put things inside the
vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is
a crash, they will keep going.
And, if you do have a heavy
load, you should spread it out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Certification
label, found on the vehicle
center pillar (B-pillar), tells you
the gross weight capacity of the
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Driving and Operating
Starting and
Operating
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Things inside the vehicle can
strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash.
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.
.
Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as possible.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless needed.
.
Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km (500 mi).
Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
.
During the first 1 000 km
(600 mi), avoid using more
than moderate acceleration
in lower gears and avoid
vehicle speeds above
110 km/h (68 mph).
(Continued)
.
Between the first 1 000 km
(600 mi) and 5 000 km
(3,000 mi), heavy
acceleration in lower gears
can be used. Vehicle speeds
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-15
above 110 km/h (68 mph)
should be limited to
five minutes per use.
access system. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Ignition Positions
.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
must be in ON/RUN and the brake
pedal must be applied.
Stopping the Engine/OFF (No
Indicator Lights): When the
vehicle is stopped, press the engine
START/STOP button once to turn
the engine off.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the
ignition will turn off, and Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑19.
.
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Driving
The vehicle has an electronic
keyless ignition with pushbutton
start.
Characteristics and Towing
Tips on page 9‑59 for the
trailer towing capabilities of
your vehicle and more
information.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the
ignition will return to ACC/
Pressing the button cycles it through
three modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the
Engine/OFF.
ACCESSORY and display the
message SHIFT TO PARK in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Transmission Messages on
page 5‑44. When the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park), the ignition
system will switch to OFF.
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
The transmitter must be in the
vehicle for the system to operate.
If the pushbutton start is not
working, the vehicle may be near a
strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the remote keyless
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Driving and Operating
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Electric Parking Brake on
page 9‑26.
The ignition will switch from ACC/
ACCESSORY to OFF after
five minutes to prevent battery
rundown.
WARNING
{
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator
Light): This mode is for driving and
starting. With the ignition off, and
the brake pedal applied, pressing
the button once will place the
ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
Once engine cranking begins,
release the button. Engine cranking
will continue until the engine starts.
See Starting the Engine on
If the vehicle must be shut off in an
emergency:
Turning off the vehicle while
moving may cause loss of power
assist in the brake and steering
systems and disable the airbags.
While driving, only shut the
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
vehicle off in an emergency.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This can be done while the
vehicle is moving. After shifting
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
brakes and steer the vehicle to a
safe location.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
and must be shut off while driving,
press and hold the engine START/
STOP button for longer than
two seconds, or press twice in
five seconds.
page 9‑17. The ignition will then
remain in ON/RUN.
Service Only Mode
This power mode is available for
service and diagnostics, and to
verify the proper operation of the
malfunction indicator lamp as may
be required for emission inspection
purposes. With the vehicle off, and
the brake pedal not applied,
pressing and holding the button for
more than five seconds will place
the vehicle in Service Only Mode.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
OFF. On vehicles with an
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber
Indicator Light): This mode allows
the use of some electrical
accessories when the engine is off.
automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn
the ignition to the OFF position.
With the ignition off, pressing the
button one time without the brake
pedal applied will place the ignition
system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-17
The instruments and audio systems
will operate as they do in ON/RUN,
but the vehicle will not be able to be
driven. The engine will not start in
Service Only Mode. Push the button
again to turn the vehicle off.
Starting Procedure
the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery” in Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
1. With the keyless access system,
the transmitter must be in the
vehicle. Put your foot on the
brake pedal and push the
START button. When the engine
begins cranking, let go of the
button.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the START
button is pressed, and then
released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few
seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not
start and the button is pressed
for many seconds, cranking will
be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by pressing the START button a
second time.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
The idle speed will go down as
the engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
If the transmitter is not in the
vehicle or something is
interfering with the transmitter,
the Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display a message.
See Key and Lock Messages on
page 5‑38.
Notice: If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
See Add-On Electrical Equipment
on page 9‑64.
If the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
needs replacing, the DIC will
display a message. The vehicle
can still be driven. See “Starting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Driving and Operating
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by pressing
the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can
overheat and damage the
cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater,
2. If the engine does not start after
five to 10 seconds, especially in
very cold weather (below −18°C
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there
as you press the START button,
for up to a maximum of
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
The electrical cord is on the
driver side of the engine
compartment, between the
fender and the engine
compartment fuse block.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to
allow the cranking motor to cool
down. When the engine starts,
let go of the button and the
accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do
the same thing. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine.
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
WARNING
{
1. Turn off the engine.
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Shifting Into Park
9-19
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
WARNING (Continued)
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
apply the parking brake. See
Electric Parking Brake on
page 9‑26.
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
.
Infotainment System
.
Power Windows
.
Sunroof (If Equipped)
3. Turn the ignition off.
.
Accessory Power Outlets
Leaving the Vehicle with the
Engine Running
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
Power to the infotainment system
will continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is
opened.
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
WARNING
{
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
It could overheat and catch fire.
Power to the power windows and
sunroof will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes or until any door is
opened.
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
All of these features will work when
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Driving and Operating
toward you. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked
into P (Park).
Shifting out of Park
WARNING (Continued)
This vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transmission shift lock
control system. The shift lock
control is designed to prevent
movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in
ON/RUN and the brake pedal is
applied.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of
the vehicle puts too much force on
the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"
listed previously.
The shift lock control is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9-volt) battery.
page 9‑19. If you are towing a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑59.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑71.
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold
down the regular brake pedal. See if
you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pulling it
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Press the shift lever button.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑59.
4. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-21
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
Engine Exhaust
WARNING (Continued)
.
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
WARNING
{
Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service.
.
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Parking over Things
That Burn
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
.
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
.
WARNING
{
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
.
The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Driving and Operating
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
Automatic
Transmission
WARNING
{
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If the vehicle is left with the engine
running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move.
See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑19
and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑21.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑59.
P (Park): This position locks the
wheels. It is the best position to use
when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
page 9‑19 and Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips
on page 9‑59.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. The regular brake must be
fully applied first and then the shift
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-23
lever button pressed before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever, then push the shift lever all
the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting out of Park on
page 9‑20.
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If more power is
needed for passing, and the
vehicle is:
.
WARNING
{
Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
.
Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to
accelerate slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle
that way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
M (Manual Mode): This position
allows the driver to select the range
of gears appropriate for current
driving conditions.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Driving and Operating
In M (Manual Mode) the
Mode). Vehicles with this feature
have indicators on the steering
wheel. The controls are on the back
of the steering wheel. Tap the left
control to downshift, and the right
control to upshift. A Driver
Drive Systems
transmission will shift as an
automatic until the Tap Shift controls
are used. Tap Shift activates driver
manual gear selection.
All-Wheel Drive
Vehicles with this feature always
send engine power to all four
wheels. It is fully automatic, and
adjusts itself as needed for road
conditions.
See Manual Mode on page 9‑24 for
more information.
Information Center (DIC) message
indicates the gear the vehicle is in.
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift into
2 (Second) gear. A higher gear ratio
allows you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
Manual Mode
When using a compact spare tire on
an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on the system,
replace the compact spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
See Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑69.
Tap Shift
Tap Shift allows the driver to
manually control the automatic
transmission. To use Tap Shift, the
shift lever must be in M (Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-25
If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Driving and Operating
also Driver Information Center (DIC)
messages. See Brake System
displayed. See Brake System
Messages on page 5‑35. The
Electric Parking Brake
Messages on page 5‑35. In case of
insufficient electrical power, the EPB
cannot be applied or released.
vehicle will decelerate as long as
the switch is held in the up position.
Releasing the EPB switch during
deceleration will release the parking
brake. If the switch is held in the up
position until the vehicle comes to a
stop, the EPB will remain applied.
Before leaving the vehicle, check
the parking brake status light to
ensure that the parking brake is
applied.
If the parking brake status light
flashes continuously, the EPB is
only partially applied or released,
or there is a problem with the EPB.
A DIC message will be displayed.
See Brake System Messages on
page 5‑35. If this light flashes
continuously, release the EPB, and
attempt to apply it again. If this light
continues to flash, do not drive the
vehicle. See your dealer.
EPB Apply
The EPB can be applied any time
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on
the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
the parking brake status light will be
on. While the brake is being applied,
the status light will flash until full
apply is reached. If the light does
not come on, or remains flashing,
have the vehicle serviced. Do not
drive the vehicle if the parking brake
status light is flashing. See your
dealer. See Electric Parking Brake
Light on page 5‑21.
The vehicle has an Electric Parking
Brake (EPB). The switch for the
EPB is on the left side of the
instrument panel. The EPB can
always be activated, even if the
ignition is off. To prevent draining
the battery, avoid repeated cycles of
the EPB system when the engine is
not running.
If the parking brake warning light is
on, the EPB has detected an error
in the EPB system or another
system and is operating with
The system has a parking brake
status light and a parking brake
warning light. See Electric Parking
Brake Light on page 5‑21. There are
reduced functionality. To apply the
EPB when this light is on, lift up on
the EPB switch and hold it in the up
position. Full application of the
If the EPB is applied while the
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
sound, and a DIC message will be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Automatic EPB Release
9-27
parking brake by the EPB system
may take longer than normal when
this light is on. Continue to hold the
switch until the parking brake status
light remains on. If the parking
brake warning light is on, see your
dealer.
message will be displayed. See
Brake System Messages on
page 5‑35. The EPB is released
when the parking brake status light
is off.
The EPB will automatically release if
the vehicle is running, placed into
gear, and an attempt is made to
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
when the EPB is applied, to
If the parking brake warning light is
on, the EPB has detected an error
in another system and is operating
with reduced functionality. To
release the EPB when this light is
on, push down on the EPB switch
and hold it in the down position.
EPB release may take longer than
normal when this light is on.
preserve parking brake lining life.
Adaptive Cruise Control (if
For maximum EPB force when
towing a trailer or parking on a hill,
pull the EPB switch twice. If you are
towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
see Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips on page 9‑59.
equipped) may automatically apply
the EPB in some situations when
the vehicle is not moving. This is
normal, and is done to periodically
check the correct operation of the
EPB system. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 9‑34.
Continue to hold the switch until the
parking brake status light is off.
If the light is on, see your dealer.
Brake Assist
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
wheels should be blocked to
prevent vehicle movement.
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
EPB Release
To release the EPB, place the
ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position, apply and hold
the brake pedal, and push down
momentarily on the EPB switch.
If you attempt to release the EPB
without the brake pedal applied, a
chime will sound, and a DIC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Driving and Operating
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal as
the driving situation dictates. The
brake assist feature will
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Ride Control Systems
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
(HSA) feature, which may be useful
when the vehicle is stopped on a
grade. This feature is designed to
prevent the vehicle from rolling,
either forward or rearward, during
vehicle drive off. After the driver
completely stops and holds the
vehicle in a complete standstill on a
grade, HSA will be automatically
activated. During the transition
period between when the driver
releases the brake pedal and starts
to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
HSA holds the braking pressure to
ensure that there is no rolling. The
brakes will automatically release
when the accelerator pedal is
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a TCS that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful
in slippery road conditions. The
system operates if it senses that
one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose
traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) vehicle, the system will
operate if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. When this happens,
the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
applied within the two-second
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
window. It will not activate if the
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
downhill, or if the vehicle is facing
uphill and in R (Reverse).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-29
required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
on page 9‑9. See Winter Driving on
page 9‑7 for information on using
TCS when driving in snowy or icy
conditions.
Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button to turn the traction
control system off. The traction off
light will come on in the instrument
cluster and the appropriate
message will be displayed in the
DIC. Press the button again to turn
the system back on. For information
on turning StabiliTrak off and on,
see StabiliTrak® System on
The TCS/StabiliTrak light flashes
when the traction control system is
limiting wheel spin.
The TCS/StabiliTrak light comes on
and the appropriate message will be
displayed in the DIC if there is a
problem with the traction control
system. When the TCS/StabiliTrak
light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
page 5‑24.
page 9‑29.
Adding non-dealer accessories can
affect your vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3.
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has an electronic
stability control system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
TCS/StabiliTrak Button
TCS automatically comes on
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
whenever the vehicle is started. To
limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on, but it may
be necessary to turn the system off
if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
or snow and rocking the vehicle is
StabiliTrak activates when the
system senses a discrepancy
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Driving and Operating
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑28 and Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
page 5‑24.
When the system activates, this
warning light flashes in the
If StabiliTrak needs to be turned off,
press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrak
button until the traction off light and
StabiliTrak OFF light come on in the
instrument cluster. TCS will also be
turned off. The appropriate message
will be displayed in the DIC. Press
the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to
turn both systems back on.
instrument cluster. A noise may be
heard or a vibration may be felt in
the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the
intended direction.
TCS/StabiliTrak Button
StabiliTrak comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. The
system should be left on to help
assist with directional control of the
vehicle.
If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak, the appropriate
message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) and the
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes
on in the instrument cluster. When
this message and light display, the
system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow,
reengage the cruise control. See
Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-31
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
briefly displays the appropriate
message on vehicle startup or when
a new mode is selected. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑42.
Magnetic Ride Control
The Magnetic Ride Control monitors
the suspension system.
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear
suspension is available on some
vehicles.
Based on road conditions, steering
wheel angle, and vehicle speed, the
system automatically adjusts to
provide the best handling while
providing a smooth ride. The Tour
and Sport Modes will feel similar on
a smooth road.
This type of level control is fully
automatic and will provide a better
leveled riding position as well as
better handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
An air compressor connected to the
rear shocks will raise or lower the
rear of the vehicle to maintain
proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the engine is
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
can give more traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. When
traction is low, this feature allows
the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle. The
limited-slip rear axle also gives the
driver enhanced control when
cornering hard or completing a
maneuver, such as a lane change.
Tour: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
Sport: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel,” or response to road
conditions.
running and will automatically adjust
vehicle height thereafter. The
system may exhaust (lower vehicle
height) for up to 10 minutes after the
engine has been turned off. You
may hear the air compressor
operating when the height is being
adjusted; this is normal.
The vehicle is normally in Tour
Mode. Sport Mode is engaged when
the shift lever is placed in M
(Manual). When the shift lever is
placed in D (Drive) the system will
revert back to Tour Mode.
If the compressor runs often for
longer than one minute within the
same trip and the vehicle remains
low in the rear, see your dealer for
service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle is not used for several
weeks, the rear of the vehicle may
look low. When the engine is
started, the vehicle will return to the
proper height.
If the StabiliTrak® system begins to
limit wheel spin while using cruise
control, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑29 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑28. When road conditions
allow the cruise control to be safely
used, you can apply the cruise
control again.
Cruise Control
WARNING
{
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being
used, it is recommended to allow
the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting
the hitch.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
J (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on and off. A white indicator
appears in the instrument cluster
when cruise is turned on.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control disengages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-33
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press the control up briefly to
resume to a previously set speed or
to increase vehicle speed if the
cruise control is already activated.
To increase speed by 1 km/h
(1 mph), press +RES up to the first
detent. To increase speed by 5 km/h
(5 mph) increments, press +RES up
to the second detent.
Setting Cruise Control
Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
press the +RES control to the first
detent briefly on the steering wheel.
The vehicle returns to the previous
set speed.
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get pressed and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control button off when cruise
is not being used.
Increasing Speed While Cruise
Control is at a Set Speed
1. Press J.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
If the cruise control system is
already activated:
3. Press and release the SET−
SET− (Set/Coast): Press the
control down briefly to set the speed
and activate cruise control or to
decrease vehicle speed if the cruise
control is already activated. To
decrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph),
press SET− down to the first detent.
To decrease speed by 5 km/h
control on the steering wheel.
.
Press and hold +RES up until
the desired speed is reached,
then release it.
4. Remove foot from the
accelerator.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
When the cruise control has been
set to the desired speed, a green
cruise control indicator appears on
the instrument cluster and a cruise
set speed message appears on the
Head-Up Display (HUD),
small increments, press +RES
up to the first detent. For each
press, the vehicle goes about
1 km/h (1 mph) faster.
(5 mph) increments, press SET−
down to the second detent.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
if equipped.
larger increments, press +RES
up to the second detent. For
each press, the vehicle goes
about 5 km/h (5 mph) faster.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Driving and Operating
The speedometer reading can be
displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed.
The speedometer reading can be
displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
.
Press *.
Reducing Speed While Cruise
Control is at a Set Speed
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
.
Press J.
If the cruise control system is
already activated:
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previous set cruise speed.
Erasing Speed Memory
.
The cruise control set speed is
Press and hold SET− down until
the desired lower speed is
reached, then release it.
erased from memory if J is
pressed or if the ignition is
turned off.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
.
.
To decrease the vehicle speed in
small increments, press SET−
down to the first detent. For
each press, the vehicle goes
about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle speed down. If the brake is
applied, the cruise control
Adaptive Cruise Control
For vehicles with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC), it allows the driver to
select the cruise control set speed
and following gap. Read this entire
section before using this system.
The following gap is the following
time between your vehicle and a
vehicle detected directly ahead in
your path, moving in the same
To decrease the vehicle speed in
larger increments, press SET−
down to the second detent. For
each press, the vehicle goes
about 5 km/h (5 mph) slower.
The cruise control system may
automatically brake to slow the
vehicle down.
disengages.
direction. If no vehicle is detected in
your path, ACC works like regular
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-35
cruise control. ACC uses camera
and radar sensors. See Radio
Frequency Statement on
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
ACC has limited braking ability
and may not have time to slow
the vehicle down enough to avoid
a collision with another vehicle
you are following. This can occur
when vehicles suddenly slow or
stop ahead, or enter your lane.
Also see “Alerting the Driver” in
this section. Complete attention is
always required while driving and
you should be ready to take
Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when:
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
.
On winding and hilly roads or
when the sensors are
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
The system may not detect a
vehicle ahead. Keep the
entire front of the vehicle
clean.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If a vehicle is detected in your path,
ACC can apply acceleration or
limited, moderate braking to
maintain the selected following gap.
To disengage ACC, apply the brake.
If ACC is controlling your vehicle
speed when the traction control
system (TCS) activates, the ACC
will automatically disengage. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑28. When road conditions
allow ACC to be safely used, the
ACC can be turned back on.
.
Visibility is low, such as in
fog, rain, or snow conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control
performance is limited under
these conditions.
action and apply the brakes. See
Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.
.
On slippery roads where fast
changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip.
WARNING
{
Adaptive Cruise Control will not
detect or brake for children,
pedestrians, animals, or other
objects.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Driving and Operating
SET– (Set/Coast): Press the
ACC will not set at a speed less
than 40 km/h (25 mph), although it
can be resumed when driving at
lower speeds.
control down briefly to set the speed
and activate ACC or to decrease
vehicle speed if ACC is already
activated. To decrease speed by
1 km/h (1 mph), press SET− down to
the first detent. To decrease speed
by 5 km/h (5 mph) increments, press
SET− down to the second detent.
To set ACC:
1. Press ].
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release the SET–
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
ACC without erasing the selected
set speed.
control on the steering wheel.
4. Remove foot from the
accelerator.
3 (Follow Distance Gap): Press
to select a following gap time (or
distance) setting for ACC. Select a
gap setting: Far, Medium, or Near.
] (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on or off.
After ACC is set, it may immediately
apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead
is closer than the selected
following gap.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press the control up briefly to
resume the previous set speed or to
increase vehicle speed if ACC is
already activated. To increase
speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press
+RES up to the first detent. To
increase speed by 5 km/h (5 mph)
increments, press +RES up to the
second detent.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get pressed and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control button off when cruise
is not being used.
Select the set speed desired for
cruise. This is the vehicle speed
when no vehicle is detected in
its path.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-37
.
To increase vehicle speed in
larger increments, press +RES
up to the second detent. For
each press, the vehicle goes
5 km/h (5 mph) faster.
The ACC indicator displays on the
instrument cluster and Head-Up
Display (HUD). When ACC is active,
the indicator will be lit.
Increasing Speed While ACC is at
a Set Speed
If ACC is already activated, do one
of the following:
Be mindful of speed limits,
surrounding traffic speeds, and
weather conditions when selecting
the set speed.
.
Use the accelerator to get to the
When it is determined that there is
no vehicle ahead or the vehicle is
beyond the selected following gap,
then the vehicle speed will increase
to the set speed.
higher speed. Press SET– down.
Release the control and the
accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will now cruise at the higher
speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the ACC is set at a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied,
ACC is disengaged without erasing
the set speed from memory.
The speedometer reading can be
displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed.
When the accelerator pedal is
pressed, ACC will not brake
because it is overridden.
A warning message will appear
on the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See Cruise Control
Messages on page 5‑36.
To begin using ACC again, press
+RES up briefly on the steering
wheel. The vehicle returns to the
previous set speed.
Reducing Speed While ACC is at a
Set Speed
.
If ACC is already activated, do one
of the following:
Press and hold +RES up until
the desired set speed appears
on the display, then release it.
.
Use the brake to get to the
.
desired lower speed. Press
SET– down and release the
accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will now cruise at the lower
speed.
To increase vehicle speed in
small increments, press +RES
up to the first detent. For each
press, the vehicle goes 1 km/h
(1 mph) faster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Driving and Operating
.
Press and hold SET– down until
the desired lower speed is
reached, then release it.
Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward
Collision Alert (FCA) System on
page 9‑47.
Press 3 on the steering wheel to
adjust the following gap. Each press
cycles the gap button through three
settings: Far, Medium, or Near.
.
.
To decrease the vehicle speed in
smaller increments, press SET−
down to the first detent. For
each press, the vehicle goes
about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Alerting the Driver
When pressed, the current gap
setting displays briefly on the
instrument cluster and HUD (if
equipped). The gap setting will be
maintained until it is changed.
To decrease the vehicle speed in
larger increments, press SET−
down to the second detent. For
each press, the vehicle goes
about 5 km/h (5 mph) slower.
Since each gap setting corresponds
to a following time (Far, Medium,
or Near), the following distance will
vary based on vehicle speed. The
faster the vehicle speed, the further
back your vehicle will follow a
vehicle detected ahead. Consider
traffic and weather conditions when
selecting the following gap. The
range of selectable gaps may not be
appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions.
If ACC is engaged, driver action
may be required when:
The speedometer reading can be
displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed.
.
ACC cannot apply sufficient
braking because of approaching
a vehicle too rapidly.
.
A temporary condition prohibits
ACC from operating. See
Vehicle Messages on page 5‑34.
Selecting the Follow Distance Gap
When a slower moving vehicle is
detected ahead, ACC will adjust the
vehicle's speed and attempt to
maintain the follow distance gap
selected.
.
A malfunction is detected in the
system. See Vehicle Messages
on page 5‑34.
Changing the gap setting
automatically changes the alert
timing sensitivity (Far, Medium,
or Near) for the Forward Collision
When any of these conditions occur,
the collision alert symbol on the
HUD (if equipped) will flash on the
windshield. Either eight beeps will
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-39
sound from the front, or both sides
of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse
five times. See “Collision/Detection
Systems” under Vehicle
ACC automatically slows the vehicle
down and adjusts vehicle speed to
follow the vehicle in front at the
selected follow gap. The vehicle
speed increases or decreases to
follow the vehicle in front of you, but
will not exceed the set speed. It may
apply limited braking, if necessary.
When braking is active, the brake
lights will come on. The automatic
braking may feel or sound different
than if the brakes were applied
manually. This is normal.
WARNING (Continued)
appears due to a vehicle ahead
changing lanes. Your vehicle may
not stop and could cause a crash.
Use caution when using ACC.
Your complete attention is always
required while driving and you
should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes.
Personalization on page 5‑45.
See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.
Approaching and Following a
Vehicle
ACC Automatically Disengages
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving
Objects
ACC may automatically disengage
and the driver will need to manually
apply the brakes to slow the
vehicle when:
The vehicle ahead symbol is in the
instrument cluster and HUD display
(if equipped).
WARNING
{
.
The sensors are blocked.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
may not detect and react to
.
There is no traffic or other
The vehicle ahead symbol only
displays when a vehicle is detected
in your vehicle’s path.
objects to detect.
stopped or slow-moving vehicles
ahead of you. For example, the
system will not brake for a vehicle
that it has never detected moving.
This can occur in stop-and-go
traffic or when a vehicle suddenly
.
There is a fault in the system.
If this symbol is not displaying, ACC
will not respond to or brake to
vehicles ahead.
The ACC active symbol will not be
displayed when ACC is no longer
active.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Driving and Operating
Notification to Resume ACC
release the electric parking brake,
press the accelerator pedal and
then RES+.
ACC Override
ACC will maintain a follow gap
behind a detected vehicle and slow
your vehicle to a stop behind that
vehicle.
If using the accelerator pedal while
ACC is active, a DIC warning
message will indicate that automatic
braking will not occur. See Vehicle
Messages on page 5‑34. ACC will
resume operation when the
accelerator pedal is not being
pressed.
WARNING
{
If the vehicle ahead has driven
away and ACC has not resumed,
the vehicle ahead symbol will flash
as a reminder. In addition, the left
and right sides of the Safety Alert
Seat will pulse three times, or three
beeps will sound. See ”Alert Type”
and “Go Notifier” in “Collision/
If ACC has stopped the vehicle,
and if ACC is disengaged, turned
off, or canceled, the vehicle will
no longer be held at a stop. The
vehicle can move. When ACC is
holding the vehicle at a stop,
always be prepared to manually
apply the brakes.
WARNING
{
The ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes if your foot is
resting on the accelerator pedal.
You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you.
Detection Systems” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑45.
When the vehicle ahead drives
away, press RES+ or the
WARNING
{
accelerator pedal to resume cruise
control. If stopped for more than
two minutes or if the driver door is
opened and the driver safety belt is
unbuckled, the ACC automatically
applies the electric parking brake to
hold the vehicle. The electric
parking brake status light will turn
on. See Electric Parking Brake on
page 9‑26. To resume ACC and
Leaving the vehicle without
placing it in P (Park) can be
dangerous. Do not leave the
vehicle while it is being held at a
stop by ACC. Always place the
vehicle in P (Park) and turn off
the ignition before leaving the
vehicle.
Curves in the Road
WARNING
{
On curves, ACC may not detect a
vehicle ahead in your lane. You
could be startled if the vehicle
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-41
ACC may operate differently in a
sharp curve. It may reduce the
vehicle speed if the curve is too
sharp.
WARNING (Continued)
accelerates up to the set speed,
especially when following a
vehicle exiting or entering exit
ramps. You could lose control of
the vehicle or crash. Do not use
ACC while driving on an entrance
or exit ramp. Always be ready to
use the brakes if necessary.
ACC may detect a vehicle that is
not in your lane and apply the
brakes.
ACC may occasionally provide an
alert and/or braking that is
WARNING
{
When following a vehicle and
entering a curve, ACC may not
detect the vehicle ahead and
accelerate to the set speed. When
this happens, the vehicle ahead
symbol will not appear.
considered unnecessary. It could
respond to vehicles in different
lanes, signs, guardrails, and other
stationary objects when entering or
exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. The vehicle does not
need service.
On curves, ACC may respond to
a vehicle in another lane, or may
not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into
a vehicle ahead of you, or lose
control of your vehicle. Give extra
attention in curves and be ready
to use the brakes if necessary.
Select an appropriate speed while
driving in curves.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Driving and Operating
.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
Do Not Use ACC on Hills and
When Towing a Trailer
Press ].
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if ] is
pressed or if the ignition is
turned off.
Cleaning the Sensing System
The camera sensor on the back of
the rearview mirror and the radar
sensors on the front of the vehicle
can become blocked by snow, ice,
dirt, or mud. These areas need to
be cleaned for ACC to operate
properly.
ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead
until it is completely in the lane. The
brakes may need to be manually
applied.
Do not use ACC when driving on
steep hills or when towing a trailer.
ACC will not detect a vehicle in the
lane while driving on steep hills. The
driver will often need to take over
acceleration and braking on steep
hills, especially when towing a
trailer. If the brakes are applied, the
ACC disengages.
For cleaning instructions, see
“Washing the Vehicle” under
Exterior Care on page 10‑76.
System operation may also be
limited under snow, heavy rain,
or road spray conditions.
Disengaging ACC
There are three ways to
disengage ACC:
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
.
Press *.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-43
Audible or Safety Alert Seat
Driver Assistance
Systems
This vehicle may have features that
work together to help avoid crashes
or reduce crash damage while
driving, backing, and parking. Read
this entire section before using
these systems.
WARNING (Continued)
Some driver assistance features
alert the driver of obstacles by
beeping. To change the volume of
the warning chime, see “Comfort
and Convenience” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑45.
.
.
Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals.
Detect vehicles or objects
outside the area monitored by
the system.
If equipped with the Safety Alert
Seat, the driver seat cushion may
provide a vibrating pulse alert
instead of beeping. To change this,
see “Collision/Detection Systems”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
.
.
Work at all driving speeds.
Warn you or provide you with
enough time to avoid a crash.
WARNING
{
.
.
Work under poor visibility or
bad weather conditions.
Do not rely on the Driver
Assistance Systems. These
systems do not replace the need
for paying attention and driving
safely. You may not hear or feel
alerts or warnings provided by
these systems. Failure to use
proper care when driving may
result in injury, death, or vehicle
damage. See Defensive Driving
on page 9‑3.
Work if the detection sensor
is not cleaned or is covered
by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
Assistance Systems for
Parking or Backing
Complete attention is always
required while driving, and you
should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes and/or steer
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
When the vehicle is in R (Reverse),
the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) and
Rear Parking Assist may help the
driver to avoid a crash or to reduce
crash damage. Some models may
also have the Rear Automatic
Braking and Backing Warning
System, Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA), and/or Front Parking
Assist.
Under many conditions, these
systems will not:
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Driving and Operating
When the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse), the RVC displays an
image of the area behind the vehicle
in the center stack display. The
previous screen displays when the
vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)
after a short delay. To cancel the
delay, press a button on the
WARNING (Continued)
traffic. Failure to use proper care
before backing may result in
injury, death, or vehicle damage.
Always check behind and around
the vehicle before backing.
infotainment system, shift into
P (Park), or reach a vehicle speed
of 8 km/h (5 mph).
1. View Displayed by the Camera
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper
Displayed images may be farther or
closer than they appear. The area
displayed is limited and objects that
are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper do not
display.
WARNING
{
The RVC system does not display
children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
animals, or any other object
located outside the camera's field
of view, below the bumper,
or under the vehicle. Perceived
distances may be different from
actual distances. Do not back the
vehicle using only the RVC
A warning triangle may display on
the RVC screen to show where the
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) has detected an object. This
triangle changes from amber to red
and increases in size the closer the
object.
1. View Displayed by the Camera
screen, during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers,
On vehicles with the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA), a red warning
triangle with an arrow may also
or where there could be cross
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-45
display on the RVC screen to warn
of traffic coming from either
The instrument cluster parking
WARNING
{
assist display has bars that show
“distance to object” and object
location information for URPA, and
on some vehicles, for the Front
Parking Assist system. As the object
gets closer, more bars light up.
When an object is first detected in
the rear, one beep will be heard
from the rear, or both sides of the
Safety Alert Seat will pulse two
times. When an object is very close
(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,
or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),
five beeps will sound from the front
or rear, or both sides of the Safety
Alert Seat will pulse five times.
Beeps for Front Parking Assist are
higher pitched than for Rear Parking
Assist.
direction. This system detects
objects coming from up to 30 m
(98 ft) from the left or right side of
the vehicle. When an object is
detected, either three beeps sound
from the left or right or three Safety
Alert Seat pulses occur on the left or
right side, depending on the
The parking assist system does
not detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, animals, or objects
located below the bumper or that
are too close or too far from the
vehicle. It is not available at
speeds greater than 8 km/h
(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,
or vehicle damage, even with
parking assist, always check the
area around the vehicle and
check all mirrors before moving
forward or backing.
direction of the detected vehicle.
Use caution while changing lanes
when towing a trailer, as the RCTA
detection zones that extend out
from the back of the vehicle do not
move further back when a trailer is
towed.
With URPA, as the vehicle backs up
at speeds of less than 8 km/h
(5 mph), the sensors on the rear
bumper detect objects up to 2.5 m
(8 ft) behind the vehicle that are
within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off
the ground and below bumper level.
Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) have the Backing
Warning System, which is designed
to help avoid backing crashes. The
system can warn of rear objects
when backing up at speeds greater
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Driving and Operating
The Backing Warning System will
beep once from the rear when an
object is first detected, or pulse
twice on both sides of the Safety
Alert Seat. When the system
detects a potential crash, beeps will
be heard from the rear, or five
pulses will be felt on both sides of
the Safety Alert Seat. There may
also be a brief, sharp application of
the brakes.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
injury, death, or vehicle damage,
even with the Backing Warning
System, always check the area
around the vehicle and check all
mirrors before backing.
driver braking, but only acts when
the vehicle may not stop in time.
The system, in some situations or
environments, may not brake or
may not brake in time to avoid a
crash. It does not detect children,
pedestrians, bicyclists, animals,
or objects below the bumper or
that are too close or too far from
the vehicle. To prevent injury,
death, or vehicle damage, even
with Rear Automatic Braking,
Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) also have the Rear
Automatic Braking system, which is
designed to help avoid or reduce
the harm caused by backing
crashes. If the system detects the
vehicle is backing too fast to avoid a
crash with a detected object, it may
automatically brake hard to a stop.
WARNING
{
The Backing Warning System
only operates at speeds greater
than 8 km/h (5 mph). It does not
detect children, pedestrians,
always check the area around the
vehicle before and while backing.
bicyclists, animals, or objects
below the bumper or that are too
close or too far from the vehicle.
In some situations, such as at
higher backing speeds, there may
not be enough time for the short,
sharp application of the vehicle
brake system to occur. To prevent
Pressing the brake pedal after the
vehicle comes to a stop will release
the Rear Automatic Braking. If the
brake pedal is not pressed within
two seconds after the stop, the
electric parking brake is set. When it
is safe, pressing the accelerator
pedal firmly at any time will override
the Rear Automatic Braking.
WARNING
{
Rear Automatic Braking may not
avoid many types of backing
crashes. Do not wait for the
automatic braking to apply. This
system is not designed to replace
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-47
Warning System at the same time.
The indicator light next to the button
comes on when the features are on
and turns off when the features
have been disabled.
Assistance Systems for
Driving
WARNING
{
There may be instances where
unexpected or undesired
automatic braking occurs. If this
happens, either press the brake
pedal or firmly press the
accelerator pedal to release the
brakes from the Rear Automatic
Braking system. Check the RVC
screen and check the area
around the vehicle before
proceeding.
If equipped, when driving the
vehicle, Forward Collision Alert
(FCA), Lane Departure Warning
(LDW), Side Blind Zone Alert
(SBZA), and/or the Active
Emergency Braking System can
help to avoid a crash or reduce
crash damage.
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) can
be turned on or off through the
Settings menu on the infotainment
system. The parking assist symbols,
guidance lines, and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) can also be
turned off. To turn the RVC system,
symbols, guidance lines, or RCTA
on or off:
Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System
1. On the infotainment system,
press the Settings screen
button, or turn the MENU knob
to highlight Settings and
press MENU.
The FCA system may help to avoid
or reduce the harm caused by
Turning the Features On or Off
front-end crashes. FCA provides a
flashing alert on the windshield, and
beeps or pulses the Safety Alert
Seat when approaching a vehicle
directly ahead too quickly. FCA also
provides a visual alert if following
another vehicle much too closely.
2. Select Rear Camera.
3. Press Rear Camera Display,
Park Assist Symbols, Guidance
Lines, or Rear Cross Traffic Alert
and then select OFF or ON.
The X button on the center stack
is used to turn on or off the Front
and Rear Parking Assist, Rear
Automatic Braking, and Backing
FCA detects vehicles within a
distance of approximately 60 m
(197 ft) and operates at speeds
above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Driving and Operating
vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC), it can detect vehicles to
distances of approximately 110 m
(360 ft) and operates at all speeds.
See Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9‑34.
FCA can be disabled through
vehicle personalization. See the
“Auto Collision Preparation” portion
of “Collision/Detection Systems”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
WARNING
{
FCA does not provide a warning
to help avoid a crash, unless it
detects a vehicle. FCA may not
detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
or ice, or if the windshield is
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
WARNING
{
damaged. It may also not detect a
vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
or in conditions that can limit
visibility such as fog, rain,
or snow, or if the headlamps or
windshield are not cleaned or in
proper condition. Keep the
FCA is a warning system and
does not apply the brakes. When
approaching a slower-moving or
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,
or when following a vehicle too
closely, FCA may not provide a
warning with enough time to help
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn
of pedestrians, animals, signs,
guardrails, bridges, construction
barrels, or other objects. Be ready
to take action and apply the
FCA warnings will not occur unless
the FCA system detects a vehicle
ahead. The vehicle-ahead indicator
will display green when a vehicle is
detected in front. Vehicles may not
be detected on curves, highway exit
ramps, or hills; or due to poor
visibility. FCA will not detect another
vehicle ahead until it is completely
in the driving lane.
windshield, headlamps, and FCA
sensors clean and in good repair.
brakes. For more information, see
Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-49
Collision Alert
Tailgating Alert
With Head-Up Display
The vehicle-ahead indicator will
display amber when you are
following a vehicle ahead much too
closely.
Without Adaptive Cruise Control
Selecting the Alert Timing
Press the collision alert/following
gap button on the steering wheel to
set the FCA timing to Far, Medium,
Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The
first button press shows the current
setting on the DIC. Additional button
presses will change this setting. The
chosen setting will remain until it is
changed and will affect the timing of
both the Collision Alert and the
Tailgating Alert features. The timing
of both alerts will vary based on
vehicle speed. The faster the
vehicle speed, the farther away the
alert will occur. Consider traffic and
Without Head-Up Display
When your vehicle approaches
another vehicle too rapidly, the red
lights, or the collision alert symbol
on the HUD, will flash on the
windshield. Either eight beeps will
sound from the front, or both sides
of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse
five times.
With Adaptive Cruise Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Driving and Operating
weather conditions when selecting
the alert timing. The range of
selectable alert timing may not be
appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions.
Active Emergency
Braking System
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) it also has the Active
Emergency Braking System, which
includes Intelligent Brake
WARNING
{
IBA may increase vehicle braking
in situations when it may not be
necessary. You could block the
flow of traffic. If this occurs, take
your foot off the brake pedal and
then apply the brakes as needed.
Changing the FCA timing setting
automatically changes the following
gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near)
for the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) feature.
Assist (IBA) and the Automatic
Collision Preparation (ACP) System.
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
Automatic Collision
Preparation (ACP) System
Unnecessary Alerts
IBA may activate when the brake
pedal is applied quickly by providing
a boost to braking based on the
speed of approach and distance to
a vehicle ahead.
FCA may provide unnecessary
alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles
in other lanes, objects that are not
vehicles, or shadows. These alerts
are normal operation and the
ACP may help reduce crash
damage by applying the vehicle’s
brake system and has a detection
range of approximately 60 m
(197 ft). Braking can only occur if a
vehicle is detected ahead. This is
shown by the FCA vehicle-ahead
indicator being lit. See Forward
Collision Alert (FCA) System on
page 9‑47.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the brake pedal should
continue to be applied as needed.
IBA will automatically disengage
when the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
vehicle does not need service.
Cleaning the System
If the FCA system does not seem to
operate properly, cleaning the
outside of the windshield in front of
the camera sensor and the front of
the vehicle may correct the issue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-51
happens, Automatic Braking will
hold the vehicle at a stop until the
brake pedal is pressed. A firm press
of the accelerator pedal will also
release Automatic Braking.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
ACP is an emergency crash
preparation feature and is not
designed to avoid crashes. Do
not rely on ACP to brake the
vehicle.
Complete attention is always
required while driving, and you
should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes and/or steer
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
WARNING
{
Automatic Braking may
ACP may not:
automatically brake the vehicle in
situations where it may be
unnecessary. It could respond to
a turning vehicle ahead,
guardrails, signs, and other
non-moving objects. This could
be uncomfortable and startling. To
override Automatic Braking, firmly
press the accelerator pedal, if it is
safe to do so.
Brake Preparation
.
Respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians, or animals.
When quickly approaching a vehicle
ahead, Brake Preparation reduces
brake response time by having the
brake system prepared for driver
braking to occur more rapidly.
.
Detect a vehicle ahead on
winding or hilly roads.
.
Detect a stopped or
slow-moving vehicle or other
object ahead.
Automatic Braking
Automatic Braking applies the
brakes, even if the driver has not
applied the brakes, in many
imminent front-end crash situations
to help reduce crash damage.
It may even help avoid some
crashes at very low speeds.
.
Detect a vehicle when
weather limits visibility, such
as in fog, rain, or snow. In
these situations, ACP sensor
performance is limited.
Automatic Braking can be disabled
or reduced through vehicle
personalization. See the “Auto
Collision Preparation” portion of
“Collision/Detection Systems” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45.
(Continued)
Automatic Braking may slow the
vehicle to a complete stop to try to
avoid a potential crash. If this
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
Driving and Operating
mirror and goes back approximately
5 m (16 ft). The height of the zone is
approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Using the Automatic Collision
Preparation System while towing
a trailer could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and crash.
Turn the system off when towing
a trailer.
lanes may result in injury, death,
or vehicle damage. Before
making a lane change, always
check mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use the turn
signals.
Use caution while changing lanes
when towing a trailer, as the SBZA
detection zones that extend back
from the side of the vehicle do not
move further back when a trailer is
towed.
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA)
If available, the Side Blind Zone
Alert system is a lane-changing aid
that assists drivers with avoiding
crashes that occur with vehicles in
the side blind zone (or spot) areas.
How the System Works
The SBZA symbol lights up in the
side mirrors when the system
detects a vehicle in the side blind
zone, indicating it may be unsafe to
change lanes. Before making a lane
change, check the SBZA display,
check mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use the turn signals.
WARNING
{
SBZA does not detect vehicles
rapidly approaching outside of the
side blind zones, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Failure to
use proper care when changing
SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
approximately one lane over from
both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m
(11 ft). This zone starts at each side
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror
(Continued)
Display
Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-53
When the vehicle is started, both
outside mirror SBZA displays will
briefly come on to indicate the
system is operating. When the
vehicle is moving forward, the left-
or right-side mirror display will light
up if a vehicle is detected in that
blind zone. If the turn signal is
activated and a vehicle is also
detected on the same side, the
display will flash as an extra
system does not need to be
serviced. The system may light up
due to guardrails, signs, trees,
shrubs, and other non-moving
objects. This is normal system
operation; the vehicle does not need
service.
The SBZA displays may remain on
if a trailer is attached to the vehicle,
or if a bicycle or object is extending
out to either side of the vehicle.
When SBZA is disabled for any
reason other than the driver turning
it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On
option will not be available on the
personalization menu.
SBZA may not operate when the
SBZA sensors in the left or right
corners of the rear bumper are
covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For
cleaning instructions, see "Washing
the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on
page 10‑76. If the DIC still displays
the SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE message after
cleaning the rear bumper corners,
see your dealer.
FCC Information
warning not to change lanes.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
SBZA displays may come on when
a passed vehicle remains in or
drops back into the detection zone.
SBZA can be disabled through
vehicle personalization. See
“Collision/Detection Systems” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑45. If SBZA is disabled by
the driver, the SBZA mirror displays
will not light up.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
LDW may help avoid crashes due to
unintentional lane departures. It may
provide a warning if the vehicle is
crossing a lane without using a turn
signal. LDW uses a camera sensor
If the SBZA displays do not light up
when vehicles are in the blind zone
and the system is clean, the system
may need service. Take the vehicle
to your dealer.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
SBZA may not always alert the
driver to vehicles in the blind zone,
especially in wet conditions. The
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Driving and Operating
to detect the lane markings. It only
operates at speeds of 56 km/h
(35 mph) or greater.
How the System Works
WARNING (Continued)
The LDW camera sensor is on the
windshield ahead of the rearview
mirror.
.
.
Detect lane markings and will
not detect road edges.
When the vehicle crosses a
detected lane marking, the LDW
indicator will flash and either three
beeps will be sounded from the left
or right side, or three Safety Alert
Seat pulses will occur on the left or
right side of the seat, depending on
the lane departure direction. LDW
will not warn if the turn signal is on
or if a sharp maneuver is made.
Warn that the vehicle is
crossing a lane marking if the
system does not detect the
lane marking.
To turn LDW on and off, press @ on
the center stack to the left of the
infotainment screen. The control
indicator will light when LDW is on.
If LDW only detects lane
markings on one side of the road,
it will only warn you when
departing the lane on the side
where it has detected a lane
marker. Even with LDW, always
keep your attention on the road
and maintain proper vehicle
position within the lane, or vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Always keep the
WARNING
{
The LDW system is an aid to help
the vehicle stay in the driving
lane. It does not steer the vehicle.
The LDW system may not:
When the vehicle is started, the
LDW indicator on the instrument
cluster will come on briefly.
If LDW is on, the LDW indicator will
appear green if the system detects
a left or right lane marking while the
vehicle is traveling at 56 km/h
(35 mph) or greater. If the vehicle
crosses a detected lane marking
without using the turn signal, this
indicator will change to amber and
flash. In addition, three beeps will
.
windshield clean and do not use
LDW in bad weather conditions.
Provide enough time to avoid
a crash.
.
Detect lane markings under
bad weather conditions or if
the windshield is dirty.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-55
be sounded from the left or right
side or the Safety Alert Seat will
pulse three times on either the left
or right side of the seat, depending
on the lane departure direction.
If the LDW camera system does not
seem to operate properly, cleaning
the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera sensor may correct
the issue.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
WARNING
{
If the LDW camera sensor is
If the LDW symbol does not appear
when the system is on and the
vehicle is traveling at least 56 km/h
(35 mph):
blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if
the headlamps are not cleaned or
properly aimed, or if the
windshield is dirty or damaged, it
may not detect the lanes ahead.
LDW may not help avoid a crash
under these conditions. Keep the
headlamps cleaned and properly
aimed and the windshield clean.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER
gasoline is only available in the U.S.
and Canada.
.
The lane markings on the road
may not be seen.
.
The camera sensor may be
blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.
.
The windshield may be
damaged.
.
The weather may be limiting
visibility.
LDW warnings may occur due to tar
marks, shadows, cracks in the road,
or other road imperfections. This is
normal system operation; the
This is normal operation; the vehicle
does not need service. Clean the
windshield.
vehicle does not need service.
Lane markings may not be detected
on curves, highway exit ramps,
or hills; or due to poor visibility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-56
Driving and Operating
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑18. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet
ASTM specification D 4814. Some
gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑56.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
Never use leaded gasoline or any
other fuel not recommended in the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
California Fuel
Requirements
Recommended Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California Emissions
Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-57
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean
and avoid problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed by
the auto companies. A list of
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
spark plug life and affect emission
control system performance. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
15% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Filling the Tank
WARNING
{
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
violently and can cause injury or
death.
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change, can
help clean deposits from fuel
.
To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the fuel
pump island.
.
Some gasolines that are not
reformulated for low emissions can
contain an octane-enhancing
Turn off the engine when
refueling.
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-58
Driving and Operating
partially remove the nozzle to add
more fuel as this will result in fuel
spillage. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑76.
WARNING (Continued)
.
Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away
from fuel.
.
.
.
Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended.
WARNING
{
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Do not reenter the vehicle
while pumping fuel.
Keep children away from the
fuel pump and never let
children pump fuel.
Locate the fuel door. The fuel gauge
has an arrow to indicate the side of
the vehicle the fuel door is on. To
open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
.
Fuel can spray out if the
refueling nozzle is inserted
too quickly. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Insert the refueling
nozzle slowly and wait for
any hiss noise to stop prior to
beginning to flow fuel
Filling the Tank With a Portable
Gas Can
If the vehicle runs out of fuel and
must be filled from a portable
gas can:
The vehicle has a capless refueling
system and does not have a fuel
cap. The filling nozzle must be fully
inserted and latched prior to starting
fuel flow.
1. Locate the capless funnel
adapter from under the carpet in
the trunk.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds before removing the
nozzle. After initial shutoff, do not
2. Insert and latch the funnel into
the capless fuel system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-59
Towing
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Attempting to refuel without using
the funnel adapter may cause fuel
spillage and damage the capless
fuel system. This could cause a
fire and you or others could be
badly burned and the vehicle
could be damaged.
means. You or others could be
badly burned and the vehicle
could be damaged. Always:
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
the entire section before towing a
trailer.
.
Use approved fuel
containers.
.
Remove container from
vehicle, trunk, or pickup bed
before filling.
3. Remove and clean the funnel
adapter and return to the storage
location.
.
Place container on the
For towing a disabled vehicle, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑73.
For towing the vehicle behind
another vehicle such as a motor
home, see Recreational Vehicle
Towing on page 10‑74.
ground.
.
Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
keep it in contact with the fill
opening until filling is
complete.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING
{
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
.
Do not smoke while
Filling a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle can cause
fuel vapors that can ignite either
by static electricity or other
pumping fuel.
Driving with a Trailer
When towing a trailer:
(Continued)
.
Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply to
trailer towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-60
Driving and Operating
.
Do not tow a trailer during the
first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent
damage to the engine, axle,
or other parts.
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. The
WARNING
{
combination you are driving is
longer and not as responsive as the
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
the handling and braking of the rig
before setting out for the open road.
When towing a trailer, exhaust
gases may collect at the rear of
the vehicle and enter if the
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
window is open.
.
.
Then during the first 800 km
(500 mi) of trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and
do not make starts at full throttle.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
parts and attachments, safety
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the
combination moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes work.
When towing a trailer:
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).
Shift the transmission to a lower
gear if the transmission shifts
too often under heavy loads and/
or hilly conditions.
.
Do not drive with the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most
window open.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when towing.
During the trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure
and the lamps and any trailer
brakes still work.
.
The Automatic Collision
Preparation System should be
set to Off when towing. See
Active Emergency Braking
System on page 9‑50.
Also adjust the climate
control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air.
See “Climate Control System”
in the Index.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid heavy
For more information about
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑21.
braking and sudden turns.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-61
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so
the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, consider the
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
immediately after towing at high
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this,
let the engine run while parked,
preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park)
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 10‑14.
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. The
combination will not accelerate as
quickly and is longer so it is
necessary to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before
returning to the lane.
If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn
out, the arrows on the instrument
cluster will still flash for turns. It is
important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. To move the
trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before starting down a long or
steep downgrade. If the
Parking on Hills
guide you.
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might get hot and no longer
work well.
WARNING
{
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift
the transmission to a lower gear if
the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-62
Driving and Operating
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
WARNING (Continued)
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
Trailer Towing
Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
3. Shift into a gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
.
The weight of the trailer.
If parking the rig on a hill:
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
.
The weight of the trailer tongue.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
.
The total weight on your
7. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
vehicle's tires.
Weight of the Trailer
Maintenance when Trailer
Towing
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3. Things that are
especially important in trailer
operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
brake system. It is a good idea to
inspect these before and during
the trip.
It should never weigh more than
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the regular brakes
until the chocks absorb the load.
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature, and
how much the vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-63
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section.
If there are a lot of options,
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
equipment, passengers, or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment. The
weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers, and cargo
in the tow vehicle must be
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's
Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑10. Make sure not to go over
the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
subtracted from the maximum trailer
weight.
Ask your dealer for trailering
information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices
on page 13‑3.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
The trailer tongue (1) should weigh
10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-64
Driving and Operating
Safety Chains
Towing Equipment
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
assistance.
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle
Notice: Some electrical
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
equipment can damage the
vehicle or cause components to
not work and would not be
covered by the warranty. Always
check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment.
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted, and
maintained properly.
.
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If so,
seal the holes when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not
sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑34 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑34.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
page 9‑21.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-1
Overheated Engine
Protection
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-24
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Vehicle Care
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-16
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-20
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-21
Wiper Blade
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3
Accessories and
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-10
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-14
Wheels and Tires
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Windshield Replacement . . . 10-22
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-36
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Tire Terminology and
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Different Size Tires and
Jump Starting
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-69
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-70
California Proposition 65
Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and
electronic systems like antilock
brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
WARNING
{
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
It can be dangerous to work on
your vehicle if you do not have
the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures
and consult the service manual
for your vehicle before doing any
service work.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from modifications or the
installation or use of non‐GM
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
not covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. See your
dealer to accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories
installed by a dealer technician.
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑11.
Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer accessories or
making modifications to the vehicle
can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑34.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑34.
Hood
To open the hood:
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
page 11‑15.
Notice: Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
contaminants to contact the
fluids, reservoir caps,
2. Go to the front of the vehicle to
find the secondary hood release
handle. The handle is under the
front edge of the hood near the
center. Push the handle to the
right and at the same time raise
the hood.
or dipsticks.
1. Pull the hood release lever with
this symbol on it. It is inside the
vehicle on the lower side of the
instrument panel.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
the filler caps are on properly. Then
bring the hood from full open to
within 152 mm (6 in) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front
center of the hood with a swift, firm
motion to fully close the hood.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-5
Engine Compartment Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Vehicle Care
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑10.
11. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑26.
To remove:
1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
(Under Engine Cover). See
Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑16.
12. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑71.
2. Remove the engine cover
bolt (2).
3. Raise the engine cover (3) to
release it from the retainers.
13. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on page 10‑17.
3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑6.
4. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 10‑6.
Engine Cover
5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall
the engine cover.
5. Engine Cover.
Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine oil.
Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑11.
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 10‑17.
8. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑12.
.
Always use engine oil approved
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
9. Battery on page 10‑20.
1. Engine Oil Fill Cap
2. Engine Cover Bolt
3. Engine Cover
10. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑71.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-7
.
Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
Checking the oil level too soon
after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit driving
of the vehicle and seek a service
professional to remove the
.
.
Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑9.
WARNING
{
The engine oil dipstick handle
may be hot; it could burn you.
Use a towel or glove to touch the
dipstick handle.
Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
Checking Engine Oil
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground. The
engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑5 for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
excess amount of oil.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑5 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Vehicle Care
vehicle warranty. Check with your
dealer or service provider on
whether the oil is approved to the
dexos1 specification.
dexos certification mark are all that
is needed for good performance and
engine protection.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity grade oils such as
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
Specification
What to Do with Used Oil
Use and ask for licensed engine oils
with the dexos1® approved
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
used. An oil of this viscosity grade
will provide easier cold starting for
the engine at extremely low
temperatures. When selecting an oil
of the appropriate viscosity grade,
always select an oil of the correct
specification. See “Specification”
earlier in this section.
certification mark. Engine oils
meeting the requirements for the
vehicle should have the dexos1
approved certification mark. This
certification mark indicates that the
oil has been approved to the dexos1
specification.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash or pouring it on the ground,
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Notice: Failure to use the
recommended engine oil or
equivalent can result in engine
damage not covered by the
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the dexos
specification and displaying the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-9
into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life
system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper
level.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on a combination of factors which
include engine revolutions, engine
temperature, and miles driven.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
1. Using the DIC controls on the
right side of the steering wheel,
display REMAINING OIL LIFE
on the DIC. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28. When remaining oil
life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
will appear on the display. See
Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑37.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
2. Press SEL on the DIC controls
and hold SEL down for a few
seconds to clear the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
and reset the oil life at 100%.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on. See
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑37.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
Vehicle Care
Be careful not to reset the oil life
display accidentally at any time
other than after the oil is
changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
change.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3. If you are driving in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
The oil life system can also be reset
as follows:
See your dealer to have the fluid
and filter changed at the intervals
listed in the Maintenance Schedule
on page 11‑3.
1. Turn the ignition on with the
engine off.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake it to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains
covered with dirt, a new filter is
required.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message is not on, the
system is reset.
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the
engine compartment on the
passenger side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑5.
The system is reset when the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message is off.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑4.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not been reset. Repeat
the procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-11
WARNING
{
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
2. Remove the seven screws on
top of the engine air cleaner/filter
housing.
1. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
(Out of View)
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
2. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
3. Lift the filter cover housing away
from the engine.
WARNING
{
4. Pull out the filter.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
6. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstall
the filter cover housing.
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
Vehicle Care
WARNING
Engine Coolant
WARNING (Continued)
{
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant mixture. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑13
and Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3.
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑14.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
What to Use
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
or 24 months, whichever occurs
first. Any repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
WARNING
{
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture.
.
Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
(Continued)
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-13
.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
If no coolant is visible in the coolant
surge tank, add coolant as follows:
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Notice: If improper coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Surge Tank
mixture, inhibitors, or additives
are used in the vehicle cooling
system, the engine could
The engine coolant surge tank is in
the engine compartment on the
driver side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑5.
WARNING
{
overheat and be damaged. Too
much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack engine cooling
parts. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Use only
the proper mixture of engine
coolant for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13.
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the surge tank. If the coolant inside
the surge tank is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant
level is not at or above the mark
pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
Never dispose of engine coolant by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on
the ground, or pouring into sewers,
streams, or bodies of water. Have
the coolant changed by an
authorized service center, familiar
with legal requirements regarding
used coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
health.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
DEX-COOL coolant.
Be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14
Vehicle Care
WARNING
1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise. If a hiss is
heard, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
{
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn
the cap when the cooling system,
including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and surge tank pressure
cap to cool.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly and remove it.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an engine coolant
temperature gauge and an engine
temperature light to warn of engine
overheating.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture to the mark
pointed to on the front of the
coolant surge tank.
There are also engine hot
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans. By this
time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be
lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the
coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the mark pointed to on
the front of the coolant
messages that may be displayed in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Engine Cooling System
Messages on page 5‑37.
If the decision is made not to lift the
hood when one of these warnings
appears, but get service help right
away. See Roadside Service on
page 13‑5.
The coolant surge tank pressure
cap can be removed when the
cooling system, including the surge
tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot.
If the decision is made to lift the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
parked on a level surface.
surge tank.
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-15
.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, the fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
WARNING (Continued)
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
Notice: Running the engine
without coolant may cause
damage or a fire. Vehicle damage
would not be covered by the
warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑16 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop the
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral), and let the
engine idle.
If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
If the temperature overheat gauge is
no longer in the overheat zone or an
overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front
of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
WARNING
{
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
(Continued)
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16
Vehicle Care
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on in the
instrument cluster, to indicate the
vehicle has entered overheated
engine protection operating mode.
The temperature gauge also
indicates an overheat condition
exists. Driving extended distances
and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be
avoided.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the
system or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode
allows the vehicle to be driven to a
safe place in an emergency
Power Steering Fluid
Check the level when the engine
is cool.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Remove the engine cover. Refer
to Engine Cover on page 10‑6.
situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists, an overheat
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
The power steering fluid reservoir is
under the engine cover on the
passenger side toward the rear of
the engine compartment. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑5.
protection mode, which alternates
firing groups of cylinders, helps
prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there is significant loss in
power and engine performance.
3. Turn the cap counterclockwise
and pull it straight up.
4. Wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
5. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-17
.
Do not mix water with
6. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Adding Washer Fluid
The appropriate message will
appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the fluid level is
low. See Washer Fluid Messages on
page 5‑45.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage
the tank if it is
The fluid level should be
between MIN and MAX on the
dipstick.
completely full.
What to Use
.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13. Always
use the proper fluid.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑5 for reservoir location.
Washer Fluid
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
What to Use
When adding windshield washer
fluid to the vehicle, be sure to read
the manufacturer instructions before
use. If you will be operating your
vehicle in an area where the
Notice
.
When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer instructions for
adding water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18
Vehicle Care
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
WARNING
{
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
Brake Fluid
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
Replacing Brake System Parts
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑5 for the location of the
reservoir.
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-19
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
.
The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake
Notice
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
.
Using the wrong fluid can
badly damage brake
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑21.
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-20
Vehicle Care
spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
is a fluid leak or unusual noise.
If required, have the transfer case
serviced by your dealer.
Vehicle Storage
WARNING
{
Battery
Starter Switch Check
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑71 for tips on working
around a battery without
Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑5 for battery location.
WARNING
{
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
getting hurt.
WARNING
{
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Electric Parking Brake on
page 9‑26.
All-Wheel Drive
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
Transfer Case
Under normal driving conditions,
transfer case fluid does not require
changing or checking unless there
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-21
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Electric Parking Brake on
page 9‑26.
WARNING (Continued)
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
WARNING
{
.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
WARNING
{
.
To check the P (Park)
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22
Vehicle Care
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking. See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3.
The windshield is part of the HUD
system. If the vehicle has to have
the windshield replaced, get one
that is designed for HUD or the
HUD image may look out of focus.
It is a good idea to clean the wiper
blade assembly on a regular basis.
When worn, or cleaning is
ineffective, replace the wiper blade.
For proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑14.
2. Lift up on the latch in the middle
of the wiper blade where the
wiper arm attaches.
Notice: Allowing the wiper arm to
touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not
allow the wiper arm to touch the
windshield.
3. With the latch open, pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
To replace the wiper blade:
5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
1. Pull the wiper assembly away
from the windshield.
blade replacement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps.
For replacement of any LED lighting
assembly, contact your dealer.
10-23
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset and
should need no further adjustment.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑25.
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
the headlamp aim may be affected.
If adjustment to the headlamps is
necessary, see your dealer.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Back-Up Lamps
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
WARNING
{
The high intensity discharge
lighting system operates at a very
high voltage. If you try to service
any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured.
Have your dealer or a qualified
technician service them.
1. Back-Up Bulb Socket
2. Back-Up Lamp Assembly
To replace one of these bulbs:
After an HID headlamp bulb has
been replaced, the beam might be a
slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
1. Reach under the rear fascia and
locate the back-up lamp
assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-24
Vehicle Care
2. Remove the bulb socket (1) by
turning counterclockwise and
pulling straight out of the lamp
assembly (2).
1. Bulb Socket
License Plate Lamp
2. Bulb
3. Lamp Assembly
To replace one of these bulbs:
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
1. Push the lamp assembly (3)
toward the right.
4. Install the new bulb in the bulb
socket.
2. Pull the lamp assembly down to
remove.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning
clockwise.
3. Turn the bulb socket (1)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly (3).
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
the bulb socket (1).
Lamp Assembly
5. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install it into the lamp assembly.
6. Push the lamp assembly back
into position until the release tab
locks into place.
Bulb Assembly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-25
Headlamp Wiring
Replacement Bulbs
Electrical System
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Bulb
Number
Exterior Lamp
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
Back-Up Lamp
921
(W16W)
License Plate Lamp
W5W LL
Windshield Wipers
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed. This
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
overload and fire caused by
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
If there is a problem on the road and
a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-26
Vehicle Care
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
possible.
To remove the fuse block cover,
squeeze the three retaining clips on
the cover and lift it straight up.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑26, Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 10‑30, and Rear
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-27
J-Case
Usage
Fuses
25
Retained Accessory
Power
26
27
28
41
Antilock Brake
System Pump
Electric Parking
Brake
Rear Window
Defogger
Brake Vacuum
Assist Pump
42
44
45
Cooling Fan K2
Headlamp Washer
Cooling Fan K1
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Rear Power
Mini Fuses
Usage
21
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
1
Transmission
Control
Module — Battery
Windows
22
24
Sunroof
6
Wiper
Front Power
Windows
2
Engine Control
Module Battery
12
Starter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-28
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Left Front
Heated Seat
3
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
13
Run/Crank for
Transmission
31
Control Module and
Fuel System Control
Module
5
8
Engine Control
Module Run/Crank
32
33
34
Body Control
Module 6
Ignition
Coils — Even (Six
Cylinder Engine)
Right Front
Heated Seat
14
15
16
18
20
23
Right Rear
Heated Seat
Antilock Brake
System Valves
Left Rear
Heated Seat
9
Ignition Coils — Odd
(Six Cylinder
Engine)
35
37
38
46
47
Amplifier
Vented Seats Run/
Crank
Right High Beam
Left High Beam
Cooling Fan Relay
10
Engine Control
Module — Switched
Battery (from Engine
Control Module
Relay)
Autonet Run/Crank
(Aftermarket)
Heated Steering
Wheel
Six Cylinder
Engine: Pre
Catalytic Converter
Oxygen Sensor
Heater, Canister
Purge Solenoid
11
Six Cylinder
Engine: Post
Variable Effort
Steering
(if equipped)
Catalytic Converter
Oxygen Sensor
Heater, Mass Air
Flow Sensor, Flex
Fuel Sensor
29
30
Passive Entry/
Passive Start
Module – Battery
49
Right High Intensity
Discharge
Headlamp
All-Wheel Drive
Module
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-29
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Relays
Usage
50
Left High Intensity
Discharge
Headlamp
62
Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist/
Front Camera
15
17
Run/Crank
Rear Window
Defogger
Module – Battery
51
52
53
Horn
64
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
Module — Battery
Micro
Relays
Usage
Cluster Run/Crank
Run/Crank for Inside
Rearview Mirror,
Rear Vision Camera
1
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
66
67
Trunk Release
Fuel System Control
Module
2
4
Starter
54
55
Run/Crank for
Heating, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning
Wiper Speed
Wiper Control
Run
69
70
71
Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
5
Outside Rearview
Mirror, Universal
Garage Door
Opener, Front
Window Switches
8
Vent Canister
Solenoid
10
14
Cooling Fan
Memory Module
Headlamp
Low Beam
56
57
Windshield Washer
Mini Relays
Usage
Steering
Column Lock
7
Engine Control
Module
60
Heated Mirror
9
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-30
Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
Fuses
Usage
5
Infotainment and
Center Stack
Displays, Head-up
Display, Instrument
Cluster, Rear Seat
Entertainment
6
7
8
Power Outlet 1
Power Outlet 2
Body Control
Module 1
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
9
Body Control
Module 4
Fuses
Usage
The instrument panel fuse block is
in the instrument panel, on the
driver side of the vehicle. To access
the fuses, open the fuse panel door
by pulling down at the top.
10
Body Control
Module 8
(J-Case Fuse)
1
2
OnStar
Body Control
Module 7
11
Front Heater
Ventilation Air
Conditioning/Blower
(J-Case Fuse)
3
4
Body Control
Module 5
Press in on the sides of the door to
release it from the instrument panel.
Radio
Pull the door toward you to release
it from the hinge.
12
13
Passenger Seat
(Circuit Breaker)
Driver Seat (Circuit
Breaker)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-31
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
14
Diagnostic Link
Connector
23
Body Control
Module 3
15
16
17
Airbag
24
25
26
Body Control
Module 2
Glove Box
Column Lock
Module
Heater Ventilation
Air Conditioning
Controller
AC/DC Inverter
18
19
20
Pre-Fuse for
Fuses 1, 4, and 5
Relays
R1
Usage
Glove Box Relay
Not Used
Electronic Steering
Column Lock
R2
Automatic Occupant
Sensing
R3
Retained Accessory
Power/Accessory
Relay
21
22
Spare
Steering Wheel
Controls/Backlight
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-32
Vehicle Care
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block
The rear compartment fuse block is
on the left side of the trunk behind a
cover.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Fuse
Number
Usage
Leveling
Compressor
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
F04
Fuse
Usage
Number
F05
F06
F07
F01
F02
F03
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-33
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
Number
Number
Number
F08
Front Courtesy
Lamps
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
Side Blind Zone
Not Used
F36
Not Used
Not Used
F37
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
All-Wheel Drive
Not Used
Relays
K1
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
K2
Front Courtesy
Lamps Relay
Not Used
Not Used
K3
K4
Leveling
Compressor Relay
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Front Camera
Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist/Lane
Departure
Semi-active
Damping System
F19
Universal Garage
Door Opener/Rain,
Light and Humidity
Sensor
F32
F33
F34
F35
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
F20
Shunt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-34
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
.
.
Worn or old tires can
cause a crash. If the tread
is badly worn,
Tires
There could be a blowout and
a serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑10.
Every new GM vehicle has
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. See
the warranty manual for
information regarding the tire
warranty and where to get
service. For additional
replace them.
.
Underinflated tires pose
Replace any tires that
have been damaged by
impacts with potholes,
curbs, etc.
the same danger as
overloaded tires. The
resulting crash could
cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently
to maintain the
recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be
checked when the tires
are cold.
information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
Improperly repaired tires
can cause a crash. Only
the dealer or an
authorized tire service
center should repair,
replace, dismount, and
mount the tires.
WARNING
{
.
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
.
Overinflated tires are more
.
Do not spin the tires in
excess of 56 km/h
(35 mph) on slippery
surfaces such as snow,
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
spinning may cause the
tires to explode.
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep
tires at the recommended
pressure.
.
Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a
result of too much flexing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-35
.
Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
traction or performance as winter
tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
See Winter Tires on page 10‑35.
See Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation on
page 10‑43 for inflation pressure
adjustment for high-speed
driving.
Winter Tires
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires with a lower speed rating are
chosen, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.
This vehicle was not, originally,
equipped with winter tires. Winter
tires are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice-covered
roads. Consider installing winter
tires on the vehicle if frequent
driving on snow or ice-covered
roads is expected. See your dealer
for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection.
Also, see Buying New Tires on
page 10‑50.
All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
all-season tires. These tires are
designed to provide good overall
performance on most road surfaces
and weather conditions. Original
equipment tires designed to GM's
specific tire performance criteria
have a TPC specification code
molded onto the sidewall. Original
equipment all-season tires can be
identified by the last two characters
of this TPC code, which will
Summer Tires
This vehicle may come with high
performance summer tires. These
tires have a special tread and
compound that are optimized for
maximum dry and wet road
With winter tires, there may be
decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After changing to winter
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
performance. This special tread and
compound will decrease
be “MS.”
performance in cold climates, and
on ice and snow. We recommend
installing winter tires on the vehicle
if frequent driving in cold
temperatures or on snow or ice
covered roads is expected. See
Winter Tires on page 10‑35.
Consider installing winter tires on
the vehicle if frequent driving on
snow or ice-covered roads is
expected. All-season tires provide
adequate performance for most
winter driving conditions, but they
may not offer the same level of
If using winter tires:
.
Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel
positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-36
Vehicle Care
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (01–52) and the last two digits,
section.
digits represent the week
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
the year. For example, the third
week of the year 2010 would
have a four-digit DOT date
of 0310.
(2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
(4) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code are the
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number (TIN).
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(3) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the
tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(5) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
DOT Tire Date of
(6) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
Manufacture: The last four
digits of the TIN indicate the tire
manufactured date. The first two
grade tires based on three
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-37
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
(2) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire should not be driven at
speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use when a regular
road tire has lost air and gone
flat. If the vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare
Tire on page 10‑69 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 10‑55.
(4) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
Grading on page 10‑52.
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
(5) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to
420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41.
(3) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code are the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
(6) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(7) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Compact Spare Tire Example
(1) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-38
Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association.
exceed all federal safety
(6) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit
guidelines.
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
Tire Designations
Tire Size
(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
number that indicates the tire
height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
The following is an example of a
typical passenger vehicle
tire size.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item 3 of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch).
(4) Construction Code: A letter
code is used to indicate the type
of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply
construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B
means belted-bias ply
construction.
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
Accessory Weight: The
combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are
automatic transmission, power
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-39
steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑41.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑10.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑10.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords between the plies and the
tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing
materials.
passengers and cargo.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-40
Vehicle Care
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑10.
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑41 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑10.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-41
.
.
Tire overloading and
overheating which could
lead to a blowout.
of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑49.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Premature or
irregular wear.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire's traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
.
.
Poor handling.
Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires that
have too much air, can
determined by tire
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
recommended inflation pressure. result in:
See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑10.
.
Unusual wear.
.
.
.
Poor handling.
Rough ride.
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.
Needless damage from
road hazards.
page 10‑52.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
number of designated seating
positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑10.
The Tire and Loading
Information label on the vehicle
indicates the original equipment
tires and the correct cold tire
inflation pressures. The
Notice: Neither tire
underinflation nor
overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires
that do not have enough air,
can result in:
recommended pressure is the
minimum air pressure needed to
support the vehicle's maximum
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-42
Vehicle Care
load carrying capacity. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑10.
Check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold, meaning
the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours or no
more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Professional Vehicle
If the vehicle has P245/45R19 size
tires, the cold inflation pressure is
35 psi (241 kPa).
How the vehicle is loaded
affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load the vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
If the vehicle has 235/55R18 size
tires, the cold inflation pressure
depends on the vehicle mass and
should be determined by the vehicle
coach-builder. A Tire and Loading
Information label provided by the
final stage manufacturer should be
attached to the B-pillar on the driver
side of the vehicle. If the final stage
manufacturer's label is not present,
contact the coach-builder. Do not
use the tire pressures indicated on
the General Motors label. These tire
pressures are for the incomplete
vehicle and are not the correct tire
pressures for the completed
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until the recommended
pressure is reached. If the
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the spare tire. If the vehicle has
a compact spare tire, it should
be at 420 kPa (60 psi). See
Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑69 and Full-Size Spare
Tire on page 10‑70.
inflation pressure is high, press
on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve to release air.
How to Check
professional vehicle.
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
Proper tire inflation cannot be
determined by looking at the tire.
Recheck the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Return the valve caps on the
valve stems to prevent leaks
and keep out dirt and moisture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-43
Vehicles with P245/45R19 98V size
tires require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving the vehicle
at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher. Set the cold inflation
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑10 and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41.
Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation
WARNING
{
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
pressure to 260 kPa (38 psi).
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Vehicles with P245/40R20 95V size
tires require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving the vehicle
at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher. Set the cold inflation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat buildup
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high-speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
pressure to 270 kPa (39 psi).
Professional vehicles with
235/55R18 104H size tires require
inflation pressure adjustment when
driving the vehicle at speeds of
160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set
the cold inflation pressure to
40 kPa (6 psi) above the
recommended cold tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label for the
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
235/55R18 104H size tires.
Return the tires to the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressure when high-speed driving
vehicle load.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-44
Vehicle Care
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑44.
under-inflated.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada
Standards
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-45
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the tires and transmits the tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed. For
additional information and details
about the DIC operation and
displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑48, Tire Rotation on
page 10‑48 and Tires on
page 10‑34.
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use only the
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure is getting low and
needs to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
on the instrument cluster. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑10.
GM-approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of the original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑10, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information
label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 10‑41.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑57 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
A message to check the pressure in
a specific tire displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). The low
tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
The TPMS can warn about a low
tire pressure condition but it does
not replace normal tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-46
Vehicle Care
.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the tires. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off after
successfully completing the
sensor matching process. See
"TPMS Sensor Matching
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message also
displays. The malfunction light and
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the problem
is corrected. Some of the conditions
that can cause these to come
on are:
If the TPMS is not functioning
properly it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
Process" later in this section.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off when the
TPMS sensors are installed and
the sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
your dealer for service.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new
tire/wheel position after rotating the
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. The
TPMS sensor matching process
should also be performed after
replacing a spare tire with a road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off at the next
ignition cycle. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
.
One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction
light and DIC message should
go off after the road tire is
replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor
Matching Process” later in this
section.
.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the original equipment
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑50.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-47
using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool.
4. Under the Settings menu select
Tire Pressure using the five-way
DIC control on the right side of
the steering wheel. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28.
8. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 7.
9. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 7.
There are two minutes to match the
first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer, the matching process stops
and must be restarted.
5. Press and hold the SEL button
located in the center of the
five-way DIC control.
10. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 7. The horn sounds two
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
The TPMS sensor matching
process is:
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
1. Set the parking brake.
6. Start with the driver side
front tire.
2. Place the vehicle power mode in
ON/RUN/START. See Ignition
Positions on page 9‑15.
7. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve
stem. Then press the button to
activate the TPMS sensor.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
11. Press STOP to turn the
ignition off.
3. Make sure the Tire Pressure info
display option is turned on. The
info displays on the DIC can be
turned on and off through the
Settings menu. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28.
12. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-48
Vehicle Care
.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
for New Tires on page 10‑54
and Wheel Replacement on
page 10‑54.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
Tire Rotation
Replace the tire if:
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3.
.
The indicators at three or
more places around the tire
can be seen.
.
Tires are rotated to achieve a
uniform wear for all tires. The
first rotation is the most
important.
There is cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is
Use this rotation pattern when
rotating the tires.
Anytime unusual wear is
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
noticed, rotate the tires as soon
as possible, check for proper tire
inflation pressure, and check for
damaged tires or wheels. If the
unusual wear continues after the
rotation, check the wheel
Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
Adjust the front and rear tires to
the recommended inflation
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label after
the tires have been rotated. See
alignment. See When It Is Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-49
Tire Pressure on page 9‑10 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑10.
WARNING (Continued)
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑44.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
Check that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities
and Specifications on
Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑48 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑48.
page 12‑2.
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
WARNING
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
When It Is Time for New
Tires
Factors such as maintenance,
temperatures, driving speeds,
vehicle loading, and road conditions
affect the wear rate of the tires.
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This also applies to the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
never used. Multiple factors
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging
takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-50
Vehicle Care
equipped, be replaced after
at least a month, remove the tires or
raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall
Labeling on page 10‑36.
six years, regardless of tread wear.
The tire manufacturer date is the
last four digits of the DOT Tire
Identification Number (TIN) which is
molded into one side of the tire
sidewall. The first two digits
represent the week (01–52) and the
last two digits, the year. For
example, the third week of the year
2010 would have a four-digit DOT
date of 0310.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for the vehicle. The
original equipment tires installed
were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
GM recommends replacing worn
tires in complete sets of four.
Uniform tread depth on all tires
will help to maintain the
performance of the vehicle.
Braking and handling
performance may be adversely
affected if all the tires are not
replaced at the same time.
If proper rotation and
maintenance have been done,
all four tires should wear out at
about the same time. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑48 for
information on proper tire
system rating. When
Vehicle Storage
replacement tires are needed,
GM strongly recommends
buying tires with the same TPC
Spec rating.
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
area away from direct sunlight to
slow aging. This area should be free
of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of the
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire
Parking for an extended period can
cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
rotation. However, if it is
necessary to replace only one
axle set of worn tires, place the
new tires on the rear axle.
pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
driving. When storing a vehicle for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-51
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as the original equipment
tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated
tires. Never exceed the winter
tire's maximum speed capability
when using winter tires with a
lower speed rating.
sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating, and
construction (radial) as the
original tires.
WARNING
{
Mixing tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may cause
loss of control of the vehicle,
resulting in a crash or other
vehicle damage. Use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels.
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑43.
WARNING
{
Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting
to mount or dismount a tire
could cause injury or death.
Only your dealer or authorized
tire service center should
mount or dismount the tires.
WARNING
The Tire and Loading
{
Information label indicates the
original equipment tires on the
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑10.
Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle may cause the wheel
rim flanges to develop cracks
after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover
If the vehicle tires must be
replaced with a tire that does not
have a TPC Spec number, make
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-52
Vehicle Care
may be affected. If the vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, electronic stability control,
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance
of these systems can also be
affected.
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production
tires.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example:
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
WARNING
{
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
If different sized wheels are used,
there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if
tires not recommended for those
wheels are selected. This
increases the chance of a crash
and serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires by
treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑50 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3.
compact spare tires, tires with
course. For example, a tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-53
graded 150 would wear one and
one-half (1½) times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and
differences in road
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance which all
characteristics and climate.
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
provide the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular
basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
one side or the other. If the vehicle
vibrates when driving on a smooth
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-54
Vehicle Care
road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
and cause loss of control, causing
a crash. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
Replacing a wheel with a used
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
driven may be unknown. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
When replacing wheels, use a
new GM original equipment
wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
Tire Chains
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel that is needed.
WARNING
{
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
Professional vehicle wheels have a
unique offset and bolt hole diameter.
Professional vehicle wheels have
six wheel nuts. Non-professional
vehicle wheels have five wheel nuts.
See Tire Changing on page 10‑65.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-55
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
while driving, especially if the tires
are maintained properly. See Tires
on page 10‑34. If air goes out of a
tire, it is much more likely to leak
out slowly. But if there is ever a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause loss of
control and a crash.
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has been
driven on while severely
underinflated or flat may cause a
blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely underinflated or flat.
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon as
possible.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for the vehicle's
tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow
and readjust or remove the
traction device if it contacts the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install
them on the front tires.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
used in a skid. Stop pressing the
accelerator pedal and steer to
straighten the vehicle. It may be
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
WARNING
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
if possible.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-56
Vehicle Care
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below.
Then see Tire Changing on
page 10‑65. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑57.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall
causing injury or death. Find a
level place to change the tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (1).
2. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
1. Wheel Block
2. Flat Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-57
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire or tire changing
equipment, and on some vehicles
there may not be a place to store
a tire.
WARNING
{
Overinflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant
and compressor kit instructions
and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
exceed the recommended
pressure.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
be used to inflate an
WARNING
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑21.
underinflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Service on
page 13‑5.
WARNING
{
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-58
Vehicle Care
The kit includes:
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
2. On/Off Button
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Pressure Deflation Button
5. Tire Sealant Canister
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
7. Air Only Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister. The
sealant canister should be replaced
before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-59
3. Pressure Gauge
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a
4. Pressure Deflation Button
5. Tire Sealant Canister
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
7. Air Only Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑55 for other important
safety warnings.
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
2. On/Off Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-60
Vehicle Care
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑64.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (3). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑41.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)
and the power plug (8).
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
8. Press and turn the selector
switch (1) counterclockwise to
the Sealant + Air position.
The pressure gauge (3) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
4. Remove the valve stem cap from
the flat tire by turning it
9. Press the on/off button (2) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended
The pressure gauge (3) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
6. Plug the power plug (8) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-61
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Service on page 13‑5.
15. Replace the sealant/air hose
(6), and the power plug (8)
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1–11 under “Using the
Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a
Tire (Not Punctured).”
back in their original location.
11. Press the on/off button (2) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service on
page 13‑5.
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the
vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire,
therefore, Steps 12–18 must be
done immediately after
Step 11.
16. If the flat tire was able to inflate
to the recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (5) and place it
in a highly visible location. Do
not exceed the speed on this
label until the damaged tire is
repaired or replaced.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 68 kPa
(10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the
tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
12. Unplug the power plug (8) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-62
Vehicle Care
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (5) and sealant/air
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Pressure Deflation Button
5. Tire Sealant Canister
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
7. Air Only Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
hose (6) assembly at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.
22. Replace with a new canister
assembly available from your
dealer.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
23. After temporarily sealing the
tire using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within 161 km (100 mi) of
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑55 for other important
safety warnings.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured)
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑64.
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
2. Unwrap the air only hose (7) and
the power plug (8).
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
2. On/Off Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-63
3. Place the kit on the ground.
8. Press and turn the selector
switch (1) clockwise to the Air
Only position.
excess pressure by pressing
the pressure deflation
button (4) until the proper
pressure reading is reached.
This option is only functional
when using the air only
hose (7).
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
9. Press the on/off button (2) to
turn the compressor on.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
11. Press the on/off button (2) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
5. Attach the air only hose (7) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (3). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑41.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
6. Plug the power plug (8) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
12. Unplug the power plug (8) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
The pressure gauge (3) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading. The
compressor may be turned on/
off until the correct pressure is
reached.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
13. Disconnect the air only hose
(7) from the tire valve stem, by
turning it counterclockwise, and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
14. Replace the air only hose (7)
and the power plug (8) and
cord back in its original
location.
If you inflate the tire higher
than the recommended
pressure you can adjust the
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-64
Vehicle Care
15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
2. Press the canister release
button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
3. Turn the wing nut
5. Push the new canister into
place.
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
To access the tire sealant and
compressor kit:
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑14.
2. Lift the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-65
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑55.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove the wheel nut caps.
3. Turn the retainer nut
counterclockwise and remove
the spare tire. Place the spare
tire next to the tire being
changed.
1. Retainer Nut
4. The jack and tools are stored
below the spare tire. Remove
them from their container and
place them near the tire being
changed.
2. Jack
3. Wrench
4. Tow Hook (If Equipped)
5. Fastener
3. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts, but do not
remove them yet.
If this is a professional vehicle, see
the Coachbuilder’s Owner Manual
for information on the spare tire and
tools storage and location.
To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
4. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-66
Vehicle Care
5. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
WARNING
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
WARNING
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
8. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat tire,
as shown. The jack must not be
used in any other position.
WARNING
{
6. Place the hex tube end of the
wrench over the hex head of
the jack.
Raising the vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
7. Place the jack under the vehicle.
Notice: Make sure that the jack
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-67
WARNING (Continued)
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the
jack handle clockwise. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room
for the road tire to clear the
ground.
10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
11. Remove the flat tire.
WARNING
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
12. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
13. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-68
Vehicle Care
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning
the jack handle
counterclockwise.
WARNING
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-69
17. Lower the jack all the way and
remove the jack from under the
vehicle.
To store the compact spare tire, use
the shorter mounting bolt.
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
with the wheel wrench.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Compact Spare Tire
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
1. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to remove the
fastener.
2. Replace the fastener with the
one provided in the foam.
3. Turn the wrench clockwise to
tighten the fastener.
If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire, it was fully inflated when new;
however, it can lose air over time.
Check the inflation pressure
regularly. It should be 420 kPa
(60 psi).
4. Replace the foam, jack and
tools, and the tire.
5. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
to secure the tire.
6. Place the floor cover on the
wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-70
Vehicle Care
Stop as soon as possible and check
that the spare tire is correctly
Do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
After installing the spare tire on the
vehicle, stop as soon as possible
and check that the spare is correctly
inflated. The spare tire is made to
perform well at speeds up to
112 km/h (70 mph) at the
recommended inflation pressure, so
you can finish your trip.
inflated after being installed on the
vehicle. The compact spare tire is
designed for temporary use only.
The vehicle will perform differently
with the spare tire installed and it is
recommended that the vehicle
speed be limited to 80 km/h
(50 mph). To conserve the tread of
the spare tire, have the standard tire
repaired or replaced as soon as
convenient and return the spare tire
to the storage area.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and the
chains. Do not use tire chains on
the compact spare.
Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced and installed
back onto the vehicle as soon as
possible so the spare tire will be
available in case it is needed again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of
different sizes, because they will not
fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel
together.
Full-Size Spare Tire
If this vehicle came with a full-size
spare tire, it was fully inflated when
new, however, it can lose air over
time. Check the inflation pressure
regularly. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41 and Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑10 for information
regarding proper tire inflation and
loading the vehicle. For instructions
on how to remove, install, or store a
spare tire, see Tire Changing on
page 10‑65.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel, and other parts of the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-71
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
page 10‑5. You should always use
this remote positive location, instead
of the terminal on the battery.
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10‑20.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
If the battery has run down, try to
use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
WARNING
{
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.
They contain acid that can
The vehicle has a remote negative
(−) ground location. It is located on
the driver side of the engine
compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑5. You should always use
this remote ground location, instead
of the terminal on the battery.
burn you.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
The vehicle has a remote
positive (+) location. It is located on
the driver side of the engine
compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-72
Vehicle Care
These posts are used instead of a
direct connection to the battery.
Notice: If any accessories are left
on or plugged in during the jump
starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Whenever possible,
turn off or unplug all accessories
on either vehicle when jump
starting the vehicle.
WARNING
{
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
Notice: Only use a vehicle that
has a 12-volt system with a
negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does
not have a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
4. Turn the ignition to OFF and
switch off all lights and
accessories in both vehicles,
except the hazard warning
flashers if needed.
2. Position the two vehicles so that
they are not touching.
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission should be in
P (Park). See Shifting Into Park
on page 9‑19.
WARNING
{
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-73
9. Start the engine in the vehicle
with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
Towing
WARNING
{
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Towing the Vehicle
Notice: Incorrectly towing a
disabled vehicle may cause
damage. The damage would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
10. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
5. Connect one end of the red
positive (+) cable to the jump
start remote positive (+) post for
the discharged battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
Have the vehicle towed on a wheel
lift tow truck. A flatbed car carrier
could damage the vehicle. The
wheel lift tow truck must raise the
rear of the vehicle and wheel dollies
must be used to lift the front wheels
off the ground.
6. Connect the other end of the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
7. Connect one end of the black
negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) terminal of the good
battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.
8. Connect the other end of the
black negative (–) cable to the
remote negative (–) post for the
discharged battery.
Reverse the sequence exactly when
removing the jumper cables.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-74
Vehicle Care
.
.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
components could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home. The
two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
equipment recommendations.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, a dolly should be used. See
the following information on dolly
towing.
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing from the Front
(Front-Wheel Drive)
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.
What is the towing capacity of
the towing vehicle? Be sure to
read the tow vehicle
manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be
Notice: If the vehicle is towed
with all four wheels on the
ground, the drivetrain
traveled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-75
Vehicles with front-wheel drive can
be dolly towed from the front.
Dolly Towing from the Front
(All-Wheel Drive)
Dolly Towing from the Rear
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow the vehicle from the front:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight-ahead
position.
The vehicle cannot be dolly towed
from the rear.
Vehicles with all-wheel drive cannot
be dolly towed.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer
instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-76
Vehicle Care
exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)
can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Washing the Vehicle
Occasional hand waxing or mild
polishing should be done to remove
residue from the paint finish. See
your dealer for approved cleaning
products.
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
wash it often and out of direct
sunlight.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Notice: Do not use
petroleum-based, acidic,
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
as damage can occur.
or abrasive cleaning agents as
they can damage the vehicle's
paint, metal, or plastic parts.
If damage occurs, it would not be
covered by the vehicle's warranty.
Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer.
Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Finish Care
Notice: Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Application of aftermarket clearcoat
sealant/wax materials is not
recommended. If painted surfaces
are damaged, see your dealer to
have the damage assessed and
repaired. Foreign materials such as
calcium chloride and other salts, ice
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
To keep the paint finish looking new,
keep the vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.
Notice: Avoid using
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
high-pressure washes closer than
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the
vehicle. Use of power washers
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-77
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking.
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Regularly clean bright metal parts
with water or chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim,
if necessary.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
For aluminum, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam, or caustic
soap to clean. A coating of wax,
rubbed to a high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be
caused by extreme dusty
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
snow, and ice.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses and Emblems
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
soap and water to clean the wheels.
After rinsing thoroughly with clean
water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
Weatherstrips
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
emblems. Follow instructions under
"Washing the Vehicle" in this
section.
Apply silicone grease on
weatherstrips to make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips
once a year. Black marks from
rubber material on painted surfaces
can be removed by rubbing with a
clean cloth. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium,
calcium, or sodium chloride.
These chlorides are used on
roads for conditions such as ice
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
page 11‑13.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-78
Vehicle Care
and dust. Always wash the
chrome with soap and water after
exposure.
check constant velocity joints,
rubber boots, and axle seals for
leaks.
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Notice: To avoid surface damage,
do not use strong soaps,
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Body Component Lubrication
Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
steel fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. Use only
approved cleaners. Also, never
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. Damage could occur
and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and
scratches with touch-up materials
available from your dealer to avoid
corrosion. Larger areas of finish
damage can be corrected in your
dealer's body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Use plain water to flush dirt and
debris from the vehicle's underbody.
Your dealer or an underbody car
washing system can do this. If not
removed, rust and corrosion can
develop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted vehicle surfaces
causing blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Steering, Suspension, and
Chassis Components
Visually inspect the front and rear
suspension and steering system for
damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect the power
steering for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-79
remain on the surface being
cleaned for extended periods
of time.
3.78 L (1 gal) of water.
Interior Care
A concentrated soap solution will
leave a residue that creates
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
use solutions that contain strong
or caustic soap.
To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Immediately remove any soils. Note
that newspapers or dark garments
that can transfer color to home
furnishings can also permanently
transfer color to the vehicle's
interior.
Cleaners may contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the
interior, maintain adequate
.
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery when cleaning.
Do not use solvents or cleaners
containing solvents.
ventilation by opening the doors and
windows.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove
dust from knobs and crevices on the
instrument cluster. Using a mild
soap solution, immediately remove
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
repellent from all interior surfaces or
permanent damage may result.
Interior Glass
To prevent damage, do not clean
the interior using the following
cleaners or techniques:
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
dampened with water. Wipe droplets
left behind with a clean dry cloth.
Commercial glass cleaners may be
used, if necessary, after cleaning
the interior glass with plain water.
.
Never use a razor or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Your dealer may have products for
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
specifically designed for the
surfaces being cleaned to prevent
permanent damage. Apply all
cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
on any switches or controls.
.
Never use a brush with stiff
Notice: To prevent scratching,
never use abrasive cleaners on
automotive glass. Abrasive
cleaners or aggressive cleaning
may damage the rear window
defogger.
bristles.
.
Never rub any surface
aggressively or with excessive
pressure.
.
Do not use laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
use approximately 20 drops per
Cleaners should be removed
quickly. Never allow cleaners to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-80
Vehicle Care
Notice: Cleaning the windshield
with water during the first three to
six months of ownership will
reduce tendency to fog.
gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the
following techniques:
4. Continue gently rubbing the
soiled area until there is no
longer any color transfer from
the soil to the cleaning cloth.
.
Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no
more soil can be removed.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution followed only by club
soda or plain water.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover
gently, so that the speaker will not
be damaged. Clean spots with just
water and mild soap.
.
For solid soils, remove as much
as possible prior to vacuuming.
If the soil is not completely
removed, it may be necessary to
use a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire
fabric or carpet.
To clean:
1. Saturate a clean lint-free
colorfast cloth with water or club
soda. Microfiber cloth is
Coated Moldings
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
.
When lightly soiled, wipe with a
recommended to prevent lint
transfer to the fabric or carpet.
sponge or soft lint-free cloth
dampened with water.
2. Remove excess moisture by
gently wringing until water does
not drip from the cleaning cloth.
.
When heavily soiled, use warm
soapy water.
Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to
a clean area frequently to
prevent forcing the soil in to the
fabric.
Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Start by vacuuming the surface
using a soft brush attachment. If a
rotating brush attachment is being
used during vacuuming, only use it
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
and Vehicle Information and
Radio Displays
For vehicles with high gloss
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-81
Before wiping the surface with the
microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
brush to remove dirt that could
scratch the surface. Then use the
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
clean. Never use window cleaners
or solvents. Periodically hand wash
the microfiber cloth separately,
using mild soap. Do not use bleach
or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
and air dry before next use.
surfaces, may cause permanent
damage. Wipe excess moisture
from these surfaces after
cleaning and allow them to dry
naturally. Never use heat, steam,
spot lifters, or spot removers. Do
not use cleaners that contain
silicone or wax-based products.
Cleaners containing these
soap solution. Damage caused by
air fresheners would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Cargo Cover and
Convenience Net
Wash with warm water and mild
detergent. Do not use chlorine
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
then dry completely.
solvents can permanently change
the appearance and feel of leather
or soft trim and are not
Care of Safety Belts
Notice: Do not attach a device
with a suction cup to the display.
This may cause damage and
would not be covered by the
warranty.
recommended.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not use cleaners that increase
gloss, especially on the instrument
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
visibility through the windshield
under certain conditions.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Instrument Panel, Leather,
Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces
Notice: Use of air fresheners may
cause permanent damage to
plastics and painted surfaces.
If an air freshener comes in
Use a soft microfiber cloth
dampened with water to remove
dust and loose dirt. For a more
thorough cleaning, use a soft
microfiber cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution.
contact with any plastic or
painted surface in the vehicle,
blot immediately and clean with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild
Notice: Soaking or saturating
leather, especially perforated
leather, as well as other interior
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-82
Vehicle Care
.
Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
Floor Mats
WARNING
{
.
.
.
Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the pedals.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
pedals.
Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
The driver side floor mat is held in
place by button-type retainers.
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to unlock the retainers and
remove.
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
.
The original equipment floor
2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
mat retainer openings over the
carpet retainers and snap into
position.
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-1
Special Application Services
Special Application
General Information
Your vehicle is an important
Service and
Maintenance
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
investment. This section describes
the required maintenance for the
vehicle. Follow this schedule to help
protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
also help to maintain the value of
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
responsibility of the owner to have
all required maintenance performed.
Additional Maintenance
and Care
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Your dealer has trained technicians
who can perform required
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15
maintenance using genuine
replacement parts. They have
up‐to‐date tools and equipment for
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
dealers have extended evening and
Saturday hours, courtesy
transportation, and online
scheduling to assist with service
needs.
Your dealer recognizes the
importance of providing
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Service and Maintenance
.
Mainly driven in hilly or
mountainous terrain.
technicians, the dealer is the place
for routine maintenance such as oil
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
blades.
Because of the way people use
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
There may need to be more
frequent checks and services.
The Additional Required
Services ‐ Normal are for
vehicles that:
.
.
Frequently towing a trailer.
Used for high speed or
competitive driving.
.
Used for taxi, police, or delivery
service.
Notice: Damage caused by
improper maintenance can lead to
costly repairs and may not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, recommended fluids,
and lubricants are important to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition.
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑10.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
.
WARNING
{
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous and can cause
serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if the
required information, proper tools,
and equipment are available.
If they are not, see your dealer to
have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 10‑3.
The Tire Rotation and Required
Services are the responsibility of the
vehicle owner. It is recommended to
have your dealer perform these
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.
.
Use the recommended fuel. See
Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑56.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
The Additional Required
Services ‐ Severe are for vehicles
that are:
.
Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
in hot weather.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-3
.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
replacement.
Cadillac Premium
Care Maintenance
Your vehicle comes with the
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance. It is a maintenance
program that covers select
maintenance services during the
first 4 years or 80 000 km
Maintenance
Schedule
Passenger compartment air filter
replacement.
Owner Checks and Services
Multi‐point vehicle inspection
(MPVI) performed by a qualified
technician.
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Check the engine oil level. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑6.
Cadillac requires that all Cadillac
Premium Care Maintenance
services be performed by a Cadillac
authorized service dealer.
Once a Month
(50,000 mi), whichever comes first.
.
Check the tire inflation
Cadillac Premium Care
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41.
Maintenance covers routine
maintenance services, when
scheduled in accordance with the
owner manual, including:
.
Inspect the tires for wear. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑48.
.
.
Oil changes based on the
vehicle's oil life monitor system.
Check the windshield washer
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑17.
.
Tire rotation every 12 000 km
(7,500 mi).
Engine Oil Change
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message displays, have the
engine oil and filter changed within
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven
under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Service and Maintenance
.
Check engine coolant level. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑12.
for more than a year. The engine oil
and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system
must be reset. Your trained dealer
technician can perform this work.
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the
last service. Reset the oil life
system when the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑9.
or missing parts or signs of
wear. See Exterior Care on
page 10‑76.
.
.
Check windshield washer fluid
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑17.
.
Check restraint system
components. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑21.
Visually inspect windshield wiper
blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑76. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 10‑22.
.
.
Visually inspect fuel system for
damage or leaks.
Visually inspect exhaust system
and nearby heat shields for
loose or damaged parts.
.
.
.
Tire Rotation and Required
Services Every 12 000 km/
7,500 mi
Lubricate body components. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑76.
.
.
Check tire inflation pressures.
See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41.
Check starter switch. See Starter
Switch Check on page 10‑20.
Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the vehicle, and perform the
following services. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑48.
Inspect tire wear. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑48.
Check automatic transmission
shift lock control function. See
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function Check on
page 10‑21.
.
.
Visually check for fluid leaks.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑10.
.
Check engine oil level and oil
life percentage. If needed,
change engine oil and filter, and
reset oil life system. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑6 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑9.
.
Check parking brake and
automatic transmission park
mechanism. See Park Brake and
P (Park) Mechanism Check on
page 10‑21.
.
.
Inspect brake system.
Visually inspect steering,
suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-5
.
.
Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.
.
.
Check tire sealant expiration
date, if equipped. See Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑57.
Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2‑24.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6
Service and Maintenance
Additional Required Services
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1)
Inspect evaporative control system. (2)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3)
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.
@
@
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (4)
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5)
Replace brake fluid. (6)
@
@
@
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-7
Footnotes — Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services - Normal
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve works properly,
if the vehicle has one. Replace as
needed.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10‑11.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1)
Inspect evaporative control system. (2)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3)
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@
@
@
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.
Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (4)
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5)
Replace brake fluid. (6)
@
@
@
@
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-9
Footnotes — Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services - Severe
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
Special Application
Services
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10‑11.
.
(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
Severe Commercial Use
Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
components every 5 000 km/
3,000 mi.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
.
Have underbody flushing service
performed once a year.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve works properly,
if the vehicle has one. Replace as
needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-10
Service and Maintenance
Battery
Brakes
Additional
Maintenance and Care
The battery supplies power to start
the engine and operate any
Brakes stop the vehicle and are
crucial to safe driving.
additional electrical accessories.
Your vehicle is an important
investment and caring for it properly
may help to avoid future costly
repairs. To maintain vehicle
.
Signs of brake wear may include
chirping, grinding, or squealing
noises, or difficulty stopping.
.
To avoid break‐down or failure to
start the vehicle, maintain a
battery with full cranking power.
.
Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
.
Trained dealer technicians have
access to tools and equipment
to inspect the brakes and
recommend quality parts
engineered for the vehicle.
maintenance services may be
required. It is recommended
that your dealer perform these
services — their trained dealer
technicians know your vehicle best.
Your dealer can also perform a
thorough assessment with a
multi‐point inspection to recommend
when your vehicle may need
attention. The following list is
intended to explain the services and
conditions to look for that may
indicate services are required.
the diagnostic equipment to test
the battery and ensure that the
connections and cables are
corrosion‐free.
Fluids
Belts
Proper fluid levels and approved
fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
and components. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13 for GM
approved fluids.
.
Belts may need replacing if they
squeak or show signs of
cracking or splitting.
.
Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the belts and
recommend replacement when
necessary.
.
Engine oil and windshield
washer fluid levels should be
checked at every fuel fill.
.
Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-11
Hoses
Shocks and Struts
rubber; cracks or cuts in the
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
split in the tire.
Hoses transport fluids and should
be regularly inspected to ensure
that there are no cracks or leaks.
With a multi‐point inspection, your
dealer can inspect the hoses and
advise if replacement is needed.
Shocks and struts help aid in control
for a smoother ride.
.
Trained dealer technicians can
inspect and recommend the right
tires. Your dealer can also
provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.
.
Signs of wear may include
steering wheel vibration, bounce/
sway while braking, longer
stopping distance, or uneven
tire wear.
Lamps
.
As part of the multi‐point
Properly working headlamps,
taillamps, and brake lamps are
important to see and be seen on
the road.
inspection, trained dealer
technicians can visually inspect
the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals,
or damage, and can advise
when service is needed.
Vehicle Care
To help keep the vehicle looking like
new, vehicle care products are
available from your dealer. For
information on how to clean and
protect the vehicle’s interior and
exterior, see Interior Care on
page 10‑79 and Exterior Care on
page 10‑76.
.
Signs that the headlamps need
attention include dimming, failure
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be
checked periodically to ensure
that they light when braking.
Tires
Tires need to be properly inflated,
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
the tires can save money, fuel, and
can reduce the risk of tire failure.
.
With a multi‐point inspection,
your dealer can check the lamps
and note any concerns.
.
Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-12
Service and Maintenance
Wheel Alignment
Wiper Blades
Wheel alignment is critical for
ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance.
Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and kept in good condition to
provide a clear view.
.
.
Signs that the alignment may
Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle
skipping across the windshield,
and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear.
.
Trained dealer technicians can
.
Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper
wheel alignment.
check the wiper blades and
replace them when needed.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
.
Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
.
Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-13
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1
Synthetic Blend is recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑6.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake System
Hydraulic Power Steering System
Windshield Washer
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 10‑12.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, in Canada 88863462).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection requirements.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission
Chassis Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Latch, Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-14
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
22753242
89017525
22743911
12622561
A3176C
PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
CF183
41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 65 cm (25.6 in)
Passenger Side – 45 cm (17.7 in)
25892079
25882578
—
—
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-15
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-16
Service and Maintenance
Odometer
Serviced By
Reading
Date
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the load floor under
the spare tire cover in the trunk, has
the following information:
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
.
Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Paint information.
.
Production options and special
equipment.
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
7.1 L
5.7 L
7.5 qt
6.0 qt
Front-Wheel Drive
All-Wheel Drive
70.0 L
74.0 L
18.5 gal
19.5 gal
110 lb ft
Wheel Nut Torque
150 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
3.6L V6 Engine
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-3
Engine Drive Belt Routing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
Technical Data
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-1
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9
Service Publications
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service or
parts manager, contact the owner of
your dealership or the general
manager.
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by your dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-458-8006. In
Canada, call the Canadian Cadillac
Customer Care Centre at
When contacting Cadillac,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
STEP THREE — U.S.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
Owners: Both General Motors and
your dealer are committed to
making sure you are completely
satisfied with the new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, you can file with the Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line®
Program to enforce your rights.
1-888-446-2000.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
.
Vehicle Identification
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of
the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-3
STEP THREE — Canadian
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer Care
Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
Customer Assistance
Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to
call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,
the letter should be addressed to:
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
or write to:
mediation/arbitration program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Care Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States and Puerto Rico
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers
The inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-4
Customer Information
communicate with Cadillac by
dialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Canada
D (Preferred Dealer
Information): Select a preferred
dealer and view dealer location,
maps, phone numbers, and hours.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Care
Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
J (Warranty Tracking
Information): Track the vehicle’s
warranty information.
Online Owner Experience
(U.S.) my.cadillac.com
1-888-446-2000
J (Recall Information): View
active recalls or search by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
on page 12‑1.
The Cadillac online owner
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112
experience is a one-stop resource
that allows interaction with Cadillac
and keeps important vehicle-specific
information in one place.
Overseas
H (Other Account Information):
View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
radio, and OnStar account
information.
Membership Benefits
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
E (Vehicle Information):
Download owner manuals and view
vehicle-specific how-to videos.
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
G (Maintenance Information):
View maintenance schedules,
required alerts, OnStar onboard
vehicle diagnostic information, and
schedule service appointments.
with online help representatives.
Visit my.cadillac.com to register your
vehicle.
I (Service History): View
printable dealer-recorded service
records and self-recorded service
records.
(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-5
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
Cadillac Owner Centre
(Canada) cadillacowner.ca
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
(U.S. and Canada)
Take a trip to the Cadillac Owner
Centre:
1-800-263-3830.
.
Chat live with online help
representatives.
Roadside Service
U.S.: 1-800-224-1400.
Canada: 1-800-882-1112.
.
Use the Vehicle Tools section.
.
Access third party enthusiast
sites and social media networks.
Text Telephone (TTY) Users
(U.S. Only): 1-888-889-2438.
.
Locate owner resources such as
lease-end, financing, and
warranty information.
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for the vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
.
Retrieve favorite articles,
Calling for Service
quizzes, tips, and multimedia
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care
Sections.
When calling Roadside Service,
have the following information
ready:
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
.
Download owner manuals.
.
Your name, home address, and
.
home telephone number.
Find Cadillac-recommended
maintenance services.
.
Telephone number of your
location.
.
Location of the vehicle.
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-6
Customer Information
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is your
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
.
Description of the problem.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Coverage
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
Services are provided up to 6 years/
110 000 km (70,000 mi), whichever
comes first.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Service: If your trip is
.
Lock-Out Service: Service to
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses may
be reimbursed during the
6 years/110 000 km (70,000 mi)
Powertrain warranty period.
Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
Roadside Service is not a part of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Service program at
any time without notification.
before this service is given.
.
Emergency Tow from a Public
Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. Only)
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Cadillac's exceptional Roadside
Service is more than an auto club or
towing service. It provides every
Cadillac owner in the United States
with the advantage of contacting a
Cadillac advisor and, where
available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site
service.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with a spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-7
A dealer technician will travel to
your location within a 30-mile radius
of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we
will arrange to have your car towed
to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Each technician travels with a
specially equipped service vehicle
complete with the necessary
Roadside Service. Mechanical
failures may be covered,
however any cost for parts and
labor for repairs not covered by
the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Specific to
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
Scheduling Service
Appointments
.
Cadillac parts and tools required to
handle most roadside repairs.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
When the vehicle requires warranty
service, contact your dealer and
request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant
of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
registration is required.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Services Not Included in
Roadside Service
Service: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders are
required. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside
Service advisor will help you
make arrangements and explain
how to receive payment.
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
.
Legal fines.
Mounting, dismounting,
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call
your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
.
Alternative Service: If
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside Service
advisor may give you permission
to get local emergency road
service. You will receive
payment, up to $100, after
sending the original receipt to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-8
Customer Information
If your dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for
same-day repair.
furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If the vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
Transportation Options
transportation is used instead of
your dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up
to the maximum amount allowed by
GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you
arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
Courtesy Transportation
Program
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or
circumstances, your dealer can offer
one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
hybrid-specific warranties in both
the U.S. and Canada.
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round-trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of your dealer's area.
receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Limited Warranty and
Owner Assistance Information”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-9
Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
General Motors reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change,
or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
ensure that the vehicle's designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice to
maintain the vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by the GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have the
damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which the vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for the vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit
Collision parts are the best choice to
poorly, exhibit premature durability/
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-10
Customer Information
corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts is not
covered by that warranty.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that the
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Service on page 13‑5.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read the lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
the lease for poor quality repairs.
Gather the following information:
.
Driver name, address, and
technicians and comparable
equipment.
telephone number.
.
.
Driver license number.
Insuring the Vehicle
Owner name, address, and
telephone number.
Protect your investment in the GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
.
.
Vehicle license plate number.
Vehicle make, model, and
model year.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-11
.
.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Insurance company and policy
number.
Service Manuals
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
Service Bulletins
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See after an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑28.
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of the vehicle.
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
If another party's insurance
In the event that the vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends
that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take the
vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The
Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-12
Customer Information
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Or write to:
Reporting Safety
Defects
Helm, Incorporated
Attention: Customer Service
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
(U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
(U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Current and Past Models
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-13
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, and notify General
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Transport Canada at
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
80 rue Noel
In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,
or write:
http://www.safercar.gov.
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
Canadian Cadillac Customer Care
Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-14
Customer Information
These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety
circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data
The vehicle has a number of
computers that record information
about the vehicle’s performance and
how it is driven. For example, the
vehicle uses computer modules to
monitor and control engine and
transmission performance, to
monitor the conditions for airbag
deployment and deploy them in a
crash, and, if equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver
control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help the dealer
technician service the vehicle.
Some modules may also store data
about how the vehicle is operated,
such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
.
How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
.
How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/
or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-15
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
OnStar Terms and Conditions and
Privacy Statement on the OnStar
website.
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
Infotainment System
Radio Frequency
Statement
If the vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system as part of the
infotainment system, use of the
system may result in the storage of
destinations, addresses, telephone
numbers, and other trip information.
See the infotainment manual for
information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
OnStar®
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
If the vehicle is equipped with
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
OnStar® and has an active
1. The device may not cause
harmful interference.
subscription, additional data may be
collected through the OnStar
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitters for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
system. This includes information
about the vehicle’s operation; about
collisions involving the vehicle; the
use of the vehicle and its features;
and, in certain situations, the
location and approximate GPS
speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-16
Customer Information
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-1
Push = to:
OnStar Overview
OnStar
.
Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview
.
.
Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Services
Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Navigation voice commands.
Requires the available Directions
and Connections service plan.
If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services.
Push Q to connect to a live
Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information
OnStar Additional
.
Verify account information or
update contact information.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
The OnStar system status light is
next to the OnStar buttons. If the
status light is:
.
Get driving directions. Requires
the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
.
Solid Green: System is ready.
.
Receive On-Demand
Diagnostics for a check of the
.
Flashing Green: On a call.
vehicle’s key operating systems.
.
Red: Indicates a problem.
.
Receive Roadside Assistance.
Push Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
Push the OnStar Emergency button
> to get a priority connection to an
Emergency Advisor available
24/7 to:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-2
OnStar
.
Get help for an emergency.
equipped with automatic door locks,
and can help police locate the
vehicle if it is stolen.
OnStar Services
.
.
Be a Good Samaritan or
respond to an AMBER Alert.
Emergency
Get crisis assistance and
evacuation routes.
Navigation
OnStar navigation requires the
Directions and Connections
service plan.
With Automatic Crash Response,
the built-in system can automatically
connect to help in most crashes,
even if help cannot be requested.
Push > to connect to an
Push Q to receive directions or
have them sent to the vehicle
navigation screen, if equipped.
Destinations can also be forwarded
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
The OnStar mapping database is
continuously updated. Visit
Emergency Advisor. GPS
technology is used to identify the
vehicle location and can provide
critical information to emergency
personnel. The Advisor is also
trained to offer critical assistance in
emergency situations before first
responders arrive.
www.onstar.com for coverage maps.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Security
1. Push Q to connect to a live
OnStar provides services like Stolen
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition
Block, and Roadside Assistance,
if the vehicle is equipped with these
services. OnStar can unlock the
vehicle doors remotely, if it is
Advisor.
2. Request directions.
3. Directions are downloaded to the
vehicle.
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-3
Repeat
Using Voice Commands
During a Planned Route
Other Navigation Services
Available from OnStar
1. Push =. System
responds: “OnStar ready,”
then a tone.
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from
Cancel Route
1. Push =. System
MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn
Navigation or screen-based
navigation system. When ready, the
directions will be downloaded to the
vehicle.
2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
with the last direction given, then
responds with “OnStar ready,”
then a tone.
responds: “OnStar ready,” then a
tone. Say “Cancel route.”
System responds: “Do you want
to cancel directions?”
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
2. Say “Yes.” System
Destination Download: Push Q,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
commands.
responds: “OK, request
completed, thank you, goodbye.”
Get My Destination
navigation system in the vehicle.
After the call ends, push the “Go”
button on the navigation screen to
begin driving directions.
Route Preview
1. Push =. System
responds: “OnStar ready,” then
a tone.
1. Push =. System
responds: “OnStar ready,”
then a tone.
2. Say “Get my destination.”
System responds with address
and the distance to the
Destinations can also be
2. Say “Route preview.” System
responds with the next three
maneuvers.
downloaded on the go. For
information about eNav, Destination
Download, and coverage maps visit
www.onstar.com.
destination, then responds with
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
commands.
commands.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-4
OnStar
2. Say “Call.” The system responds
“Please say the name or number
to call.”
3. Say the entire number
without pausing. System
responds: “Please say the
name tag.”
Connections
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
calls to be made and received from
the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
controlled from a cell phone through
the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
See www.onstar.com for
3. Say “911” without pausing. The
system responds “911.”
4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store <name
tag>. Does that sound OK?”
4. Say “Call.” The system responds
“OK, dialing 911.”
coverage maps.
5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
again. System responds: “OK,
storing <name tag>.”
Retrieve My Number
Hands-Free Calling
1. Push =. System
1. Push =. System
responds: “OnStar ready.”
Place a Call Using a Stored
Number
responds: “OnStar ready.”
2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar
2. Say “Call.” System responds:
“Please say the name or number
to call.”
1. Push =. System
Hands-Free Calling number is.”
responds: “OnStar ready.”
End a Call
2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
3. Say the entire number without
pausing, including a “1” and
the area code. System
Push =. System responds: “Call
ended.”
responds: “OK calling.”
Verify Minutes and Expiration
Store a Name Tag for Speed
Dialing
Calling 911 Emergency
Push = and say “Minutes” then
“Verify” to check how many minutes
remain and their expiration date.
1. Press =. The system responds
“OnStar Ready,” followed by
a tone.
1. Push =. System
responds: “OnStar ready.”
2. Say “Store.” System
responds: “Please say the
number you would like to store.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-5
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
are available on most vehicles. Not
all OnStar services are available
everywhere or on all vehicles. For
more information, a full description
of OnStar services, system
limitations, and OnStar terms and
conditions, see www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY
OnStar Mobile App
OnStar Additional
Information
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
mobile app to your iPhone, Android,
or BlackBerry smartphone to check
vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire
pressure; to start the vehicle (if
equipped) or unlock it; or to connect
to an OnStar Advisor. For OnStar
RemoteLink information and
Transferring Service
Push Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor
can assist in canceling or removing
account information. If OnStar
receives information that vehicle
ownership has changed, OnStar
may send a voice message to the
vehicle, requesting updated account
information.
compatibility, see www.onstar.com.
Diagnostics
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will
perform a vehicle check every
month. It will check the engine,
transmission, antilock brakes, and
major vehicle systems. It also
checks the tire pressures, if the
vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. If a
diagnostics check is needed
1-877-248-2080; or push Q to
speak with an Advisor. OnStar
services require a vehicle electrical
system, wireless service, and GPS
satellite technologies to be available
and operating for features to
function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
Reactivation for Subsequent
Owners
Push Q and follow the prompts to
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar
service offers and options available.
between e-mails, push Q, and an
Advisor can run a check.
OnStar service cannot work unless
your vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area, and the wireless
How OnStar Service Works
Automatic Crash Response,
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
service provider has coverage,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-6
OnStar
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar
service. Service involving location
information about the vehicle cannot
work unless GPS signals are
Services for People with
Disabilities
OnStar.com
The website provides access to
account information, manages the
OnStar subscription, and allows
viewing of videos of each service.
Get subscription plan pricing and
sign up for OnStar Vehicle
Advisors provide services to help
subscribers with physical disabilities
and medical conditions.
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar
Push Q for help with:
hardware. OnStar service may not
work if the OnStar equipment is not
properly installed or it has not been
properly maintained. If equipment or
software is added, connected,
or modified, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems beyond the
control of OnStar may prevent
service such as hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather, electrical system
design and architecture of the
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
crash, or wireless phone network
congestion or jamming.
Diagnostics. Click on the “My
Account” tab on the home page.
.
Locating a gas station with an
attendant to pump gas.
.
OnStar Personal Identification
Number (PIN)
Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
that meets accessibility needs.
.
Providing directions to the
closest hospital or pharmacy in
urgent situations.
A PIN is needed to access some of
the OnStar services, like Remote
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
Assistance. You will be prompted to
change the PIN the first time when
speaking with an Advisor. To
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar
and provide the Advisor with the
current number.
TTY Users
OnStar has the ability to
communicate to the deaf,
hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired
customers while in the vehicle. The
available dealer-installed TTY
system can provide in-vehicle
access to all of the OnStar services,
except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Warranty
OnStar equipment may be
warranted as part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-7
manufacturer of the vehicle
furnishes detailed warranty
information.
garages; or in an area with very
dense trees. If GPS signals are
not available, the OnStar system
should still operate to call
OnStar. However, OnStar could
have difficulty identifying the
exact location.
Unable to Connect to OnStar
Message
If there is limited cellular coverage
or the cellular network has reached
maximum capacity, this message
Languages
The vehicle can be programmed to
respond in French or Spanish. Push
Q and ask an Advisor. Advisors
can speak French or Spanish.
may come on. Push Q to try the
call again or try again after driving a
few miles into another cellular area.
.
.
In emergency situations, OnStar
can use the last stored GPS
location to send to emergency
responders.
Vehicle and Power Issues
Potential Issues
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
to function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
Some OnStar services are disabled
after five days. OnStar cannot
perform Remote Door Unlock or
Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
vehicle has been off continuously
for five days. After five days, OnStar
can contact Roadside Assistance
and a locksmith to help gain access
to the vehicle.
A temporary loss of GPS can
cause loss of the ability to send
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
The Advisor may give a verbal
route or may ask for a call back
after the vehicle is driven into an
open area.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Cellular and GPS Antennas
The OnStar system is integrated
into the electrical architecture of the
vehicle. Do not add any electrical
equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9‑64. Added
electrical equipment may interfere
with the operation of the OnStar
system and cause it to not operate.
Global Positioning
System (GPS)
Avoid placing items over or near the
antenna to prevent blocking cellular
and GPS signal reception. Cellular
reception is required for OnStar to
send remote signals to the vehicle.
.
Obstruction of the GPS can
occur in a large city with tall
buildings; in parking garages;
around airports; in tunnels,
underpasses, or parking
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-8
OnStar
Permission to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this software for any
purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the
above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all
copies.
Except as contained in this notice,
the name of a copyright holder shall
not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy
Statement may be found at
www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive
users of wireless communications
are cautioned that the privacy of any
information sent via wireless cellular
communications cannot be assured.
Third parties may unlawfully
intercept or access transmissions
and private communications without
consent.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
unzip:
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the
Info-ZIP copyright and license.
The definitive version of this
document should be available at
ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
license.html indefinitely.
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
OnStar - libcurl and unzip
acknowledgments
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All
rights reserved.
Certain OnStar components include
libcurl and unzip software. Below
are the notices and licenses
For the purposes of this copyright
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
the following set of individuals:
associated with this software:
libcurl:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley,
Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel
Stenberg, <[email protected]>.
All rights reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-9
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,
Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,
Rich Wales, Mike White
2. Redistributions in binary form
(compiled executables) must
reproduce the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and
this list of conditions in
Info-ZIP releases–including, but
not limited to, labeling of the
altered versions with the names
“Info-ZIP” (or any variation
thereof, including, but not limited
to, different capitalizations),
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further
prohibited from
documentation and/or other
materials provided with the
distribution. The sole exception
to this condition is redistribution
of a standard UnZipSFX binary
(including SFXWiz) as part of a
self-extracting archive; that is
permitted without inclusion of
this license, as long as the
normal SFX banner has not
been removed from the binary or
disabled.
This software is provided “as is,”
without warranty of any kind,
express or implied. In no event shall
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or
inability to use this software.
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and “MacZip” for its own source
and binary releases.
3. Altered versions–including, but
not limited to, ports to new
Permission is granted to anyone to
use this software for any purpose,
including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
operating systems, existing ports
with new graphical interfaces,
and dynamic, shared, or static
library versions–must be plainly
marked as such and must not be
misrepresented as being the
original source. Such altered
versions also must not be
1. Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and
this list of conditions.
misrepresented as being
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-10
OnStar
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-1
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-24
Airbags
Alert
A
Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-52
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-20, 9-24
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Assistance Systems for
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Assistance Systems for
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Active Emergency
Braking System . . . . . . . . 1-18, 9-50
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . 9-34
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Additional Information
Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Automatic
Adding Equipment to the
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Adjustments
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Alarm
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Automatic Transmission
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-10
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Shift Lock Control
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-24
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Cautions, Danger, and
B
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-22
Brake
Parking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-21
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking System
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Lower Anchors and
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
California
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49, 3-52
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-6
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Cargo
Active Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Compressor Kit, Tire
Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11
Customer Satisfaction
Door
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .3-13
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-20, 9-24
Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-43
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Driving
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Connections
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Coolant
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Cover
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9
Danger, Warnings, and
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Characteristics and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Daytime Running
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-22
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Diagnostics
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Driving (cont'd)
Engine
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-3
Exterior Lighting Battery
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dual Automatic Climate
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Coolant Temperature
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-6
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Coolant Temperature
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
E
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-21
Electrical Equipment,
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Cooling System Messages . . .5-37
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
F
Features
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Rear Compartment Fuse
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-10
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Emergency
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Front Seats
Fuses (cont'd)
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-56
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-26
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Requirements, California . . . . .9-56
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Fuses
H
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Headlamp Leveling Control . . . . . 6-5
Headlamps
G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Gauges
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-27
Heated
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
Heated and Ventilated Front
Instrument Panel
Lamps (cont'd)
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Lane Departure Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
LATCH System
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Heater
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-43
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-38
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Replacing Parts after a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Level Control
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Leveling Control
Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Light
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
L
I
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-36
Lamps
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Indicator
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-4
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Lighting
Lights (cont'd)
Service Electric Parking
M
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Lights
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Maintenance
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Traction Control System
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Messages
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Locks
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-21
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-21
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-24
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-22
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-26
Lower Anchors and Tethers
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-37
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Object Detection System . . . . .5-39
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-42
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Messages (cont'd)
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Ordering
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Overheated Engine
N
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Mirrors
Navigation
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
O
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
OnStar®
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Monitor System, Tire
P
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Parking
Brake and P (Park)
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-21
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21
Parking or Backing
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
OnStar® Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-29
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization
Remote Keyless Entry
R
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-35
Replacing LATCH System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-21
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Ride Control Systems
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-31
Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Roads
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rear Axle
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-9
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Rearview Mirrors
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Recommended
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Reimbursement Program,
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3
Running the Vehicle While
Seats
Service (cont'd)
Publications Ordering
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-9
Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Securing Child
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Service Electric Parking
Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
StabiliTrak
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
How to Wear Safety Belts
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49, 3-52
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15
Maintenance, General
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-21
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-20
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Starting the Vehicle
Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Storage Areas
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Management System . . . 4-4
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Tires (cont'd)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-43
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Towing
Active Emergency Braking . . . .9-50
Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15, 7-1
Systems
Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-17
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-5
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-44
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-59
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
Towing (cont'd)
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-64
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
U
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-74
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Traction
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-51
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-28
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-31
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Trailer
W
Warning
V
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-53
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Wheels
Vehicle
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Identification
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Turn and Lane-Change
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-23
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-13
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-42
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Windshield
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-14
INDEX
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|